1 |
205 |
julius |
\input texinfo
|
2 |
|
|
@setfilename ld.info
|
3 |
|
|
@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
|
4 |
|
|
@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
|
5 |
|
|
@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
6 |
|
|
@syncodeindex ky cp
|
7 |
|
|
@c man begin INCLUDE
|
8 |
|
|
@include configdoc.texi
|
9 |
|
|
@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
|
10 |
|
|
@include bfdver.texi
|
11 |
|
|
@c man end
|
12 |
|
|
|
13 |
|
|
@c @smallbook
|
14 |
|
|
|
15 |
|
|
@macro gcctabopt{body}
|
16 |
|
|
@code{\body\}
|
17 |
|
|
@end macro
|
18 |
|
|
|
19 |
|
|
@c man begin NAME
|
20 |
|
|
@ifset man
|
21 |
|
|
@c Configure for the generation of man pages
|
22 |
|
|
@set UsesEnvVars
|
23 |
|
|
@set GENERIC
|
24 |
|
|
@set ARM
|
25 |
|
|
@set H8300
|
26 |
|
|
@set HPPA
|
27 |
|
|
@set I960
|
28 |
|
|
@set M68HC11
|
29 |
|
|
@set M68K
|
30 |
|
|
@set MMIX
|
31 |
|
|
@set MSP430
|
32 |
|
|
@set POWERPC
|
33 |
|
|
@set POWERPC64
|
34 |
|
|
@set Renesas
|
35 |
|
|
@set SPU
|
36 |
|
|
@set TICOFF
|
37 |
|
|
@set WIN32
|
38 |
|
|
@set XTENSA
|
39 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
40 |
|
|
@c man end
|
41 |
|
|
|
42 |
|
|
@ifinfo
|
43 |
|
|
@format
|
44 |
|
|
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
45 |
|
|
* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
|
46 |
|
|
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
47 |
|
|
@end format
|
48 |
|
|
@end ifinfo
|
49 |
|
|
|
50 |
|
|
@copying
|
51 |
|
|
This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
|
52 |
|
|
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
|
53 |
|
|
@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
|
54 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
55 |
|
|
version @value{VERSION}.
|
56 |
|
|
|
57 |
|
|
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
|
58 |
|
|
2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
59 |
|
|
|
60 |
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
61 |
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
|
62 |
|
|
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
|
63 |
|
|
with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
|
64 |
|
|
Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
|
65 |
|
|
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
|
66 |
|
|
@end copying
|
67 |
|
|
@iftex
|
68 |
|
|
@finalout
|
69 |
|
|
@setchapternewpage odd
|
70 |
|
|
@settitle The GNU linker
|
71 |
|
|
@titlepage
|
72 |
|
|
@title The GNU linker
|
73 |
|
|
@sp 1
|
74 |
|
|
@subtitle @code{ld}
|
75 |
|
|
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
|
76 |
|
|
@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
|
77 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
78 |
|
|
@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
|
79 |
|
|
@author Steve Chamberlain
|
80 |
|
|
@author Ian Lance Taylor
|
81 |
|
|
@page
|
82 |
|
|
|
83 |
|
|
@tex
|
84 |
|
|
{\parskip=0pt
|
85 |
|
|
\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
|
86 |
|
|
\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
|
87 |
|
|
\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
|
88 |
|
|
\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
|
89 |
|
|
}
|
90 |
|
|
\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
|
91 |
|
|
@end tex
|
92 |
|
|
|
93 |
|
|
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
|
94 |
|
|
@c man begin COPYRIGHT
|
95 |
|
|
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
|
96 |
|
|
2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
97 |
|
|
|
98 |
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
99 |
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
|
100 |
|
|
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
|
101 |
|
|
with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
|
102 |
|
|
Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
|
103 |
|
|
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
|
104 |
|
|
@c man end
|
105 |
|
|
|
106 |
|
|
@end titlepage
|
107 |
|
|
@end iftex
|
108 |
|
|
@contents
|
109 |
|
|
@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
|
110 |
|
|
|
111 |
|
|
@ifnottex
|
112 |
|
|
@node Top
|
113 |
|
|
@top LD
|
114 |
|
|
This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
|
115 |
|
|
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
|
116 |
|
|
@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
|
117 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
118 |
|
|
version @value{VERSION}.
|
119 |
|
|
|
120 |
|
|
This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
|
121 |
|
|
Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
|
122 |
|
|
in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
|
123 |
|
|
|
124 |
|
|
@menu
|
125 |
|
|
* Overview:: Overview
|
126 |
|
|
* Invocation:: Invocation
|
127 |
|
|
* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
|
128 |
|
|
@ifset GENERIC
|
129 |
|
|
* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
|
130 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
131 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
132 |
|
|
@ifset H8300
|
133 |
|
|
* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
|
134 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
135 |
|
|
@ifset Renesas
|
136 |
|
|
* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
|
137 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
138 |
|
|
@ifset I960
|
139 |
|
|
* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
|
140 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
141 |
|
|
@ifset ARM
|
142 |
|
|
* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
|
143 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
144 |
|
|
@ifset HPPA
|
145 |
|
|
* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
|
146 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
147 |
|
|
@ifset M68HC11
|
148 |
|
|
* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
|
149 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
150 |
|
|
@ifset M68K
|
151 |
|
|
* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
|
152 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
153 |
|
|
@ifset POWERPC
|
154 |
|
|
* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
|
155 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
156 |
|
|
@ifset POWERPC64
|
157 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
|
158 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
159 |
|
|
@ifset SPU
|
160 |
|
|
* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
|
161 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
162 |
|
|
@ifset TICOFF
|
163 |
|
|
* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
|
164 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
165 |
|
|
@ifset WIN32
|
166 |
|
|
* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
167 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
168 |
|
|
@ifset XTENSA
|
169 |
|
|
* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
|
170 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
171 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
172 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
173 |
|
|
* BFD:: BFD
|
174 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
175 |
|
|
@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
|
176 |
|
|
|
177 |
|
|
* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
|
178 |
|
|
* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
|
179 |
|
|
* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
|
180 |
|
|
* LD Index:: LD Index
|
181 |
|
|
@end menu
|
182 |
|
|
@end ifnottex
|
183 |
|
|
|
184 |
|
|
@node Overview
|
185 |
|
|
@chapter Overview
|
186 |
|
|
|
187 |
|
|
@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
|
188 |
|
|
@cindex what is this?
|
189 |
|
|
|
190 |
|
|
@ifset man
|
191 |
|
|
@c man begin SYNOPSIS
|
192 |
|
|
ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
|
193 |
|
|
@c man end
|
194 |
|
|
|
195 |
|
|
@c man begin SEEALSO
|
196 |
|
|
ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
|
197 |
|
|
the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
|
198 |
|
|
@file{ld}.
|
199 |
|
|
@c man end
|
200 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
201 |
|
|
|
202 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
|
203 |
|
|
|
204 |
|
|
@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
|
205 |
|
|
their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
|
206 |
|
|
compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
|
207 |
|
|
|
208 |
|
|
@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
|
209 |
|
|
a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
|
210 |
|
|
to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
|
211 |
|
|
|
212 |
|
|
@ifset man
|
213 |
|
|
@c For the man only
|
214 |
|
|
This man page does not describe the command language; see the
|
215 |
|
|
@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
|
216 |
|
|
language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
|
217 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
218 |
|
|
|
219 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
220 |
|
|
This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
|
221 |
|
|
to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
|
222 |
|
|
write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
|
223 |
|
|
@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
|
224 |
|
|
available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
|
225 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
226 |
|
|
|
227 |
|
|
Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
|
228 |
|
|
linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
|
229 |
|
|
execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
|
230 |
|
|
@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
|
231 |
|
|
(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
|
232 |
|
|
|
233 |
|
|
@c man end
|
234 |
|
|
|
235 |
|
|
@node Invocation
|
236 |
|
|
@chapter Invocation
|
237 |
|
|
|
238 |
|
|
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
|
239 |
|
|
|
240 |
|
|
The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
|
241 |
|
|
and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
|
242 |
|
|
you have many choices to control its behavior.
|
243 |
|
|
|
244 |
|
|
@c man end
|
245 |
|
|
|
246 |
|
|
@ifset UsesEnvVars
|
247 |
|
|
@menu
|
248 |
|
|
* Options:: Command Line Options
|
249 |
|
|
* Environment:: Environment Variables
|
250 |
|
|
@end menu
|
251 |
|
|
|
252 |
|
|
@node Options
|
253 |
|
|
@section Command Line Options
|
254 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
255 |
|
|
|
256 |
|
|
@cindex command line
|
257 |
|
|
@cindex options
|
258 |
|
|
|
259 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS
|
260 |
|
|
|
261 |
|
|
The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
|
262 |
|
|
practice few of them are used in any particular context.
|
263 |
|
|
@cindex standard Unix system
|
264 |
|
|
For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
|
265 |
|
|
object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
|
266 |
|
|
link a file @code{hello.o}:
|
267 |
|
|
|
268 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
269 |
|
|
ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
|
270 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
271 |
|
|
|
272 |
|
|
This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
|
273 |
|
|
result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
|
274 |
|
|
the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
|
275 |
|
|
directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
|
276 |
|
|
|
277 |
|
|
Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
|
278 |
|
|
point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
|
279 |
|
|
as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
|
280 |
|
|
which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
|
281 |
|
|
files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
|
282 |
|
|
different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
|
283 |
|
|
occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
|
284 |
|
|
option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
|
285 |
|
|
noted in the descriptions below.
|
286 |
|
|
|
287 |
|
|
@cindex object files
|
288 |
|
|
Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
|
289 |
|
|
together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
|
290 |
|
|
options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
|
291 |
|
|
an option and its argument.
|
292 |
|
|
|
293 |
|
|
Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
|
294 |
|
|
specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
|
295 |
|
|
and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
|
296 |
|
|
are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
|
297 |
|
|
message @samp{No input files}.
|
298 |
|
|
|
299 |
|
|
If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
|
300 |
|
|
assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
|
301 |
|
|
augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
|
302 |
|
|
linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
|
303 |
|
|
permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
|
304 |
|
|
or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
|
305 |
|
|
@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
|
306 |
|
|
script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
|
307 |
|
|
extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
|
308 |
|
|
to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
|
309 |
|
|
the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
|
310 |
|
|
|
311 |
|
|
For options whose names are a single letter,
|
312 |
|
|
option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
|
313 |
|
|
whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
|
314 |
|
|
option that requires them.
|
315 |
|
|
|
316 |
|
|
For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
|
317 |
|
|
precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
|
318 |
|
|
@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
|
319 |
|
|
this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
|
320 |
|
|
only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
|
321 |
|
|
@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
|
322 |
|
|
name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
|
323 |
|
|
output.
|
324 |
|
|
|
325 |
|
|
Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
|
326 |
|
|
option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
|
327 |
|
|
immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
|
328 |
|
|
@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
|
329 |
|
|
Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
|
330 |
|
|
accepted.
|
331 |
|
|
|
332 |
|
|
Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
|
333 |
|
|
(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
|
334 |
|
|
prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
|
335 |
|
|
compiler driver) like this:
|
336 |
|
|
|
337 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
338 |
|
|
gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
|
339 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
340 |
|
|
|
341 |
|
|
This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
|
342 |
|
|
silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
|
343 |
|
|
may also arise when passing options that require values through a
|
344 |
|
|
driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
|
345 |
|
|
a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
|
346 |
|
|
and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
|
347 |
|
|
the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
|
348 |
|
|
|
349 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
350 |
|
|
gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
|
351 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
352 |
|
|
|
353 |
|
|
Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
|
354 |
|
|
linker:
|
355 |
|
|
|
356 |
|
|
@table @gcctabopt
|
357 |
|
|
@include at-file.texi
|
358 |
|
|
|
359 |
|
|
@kindex -a @var{keyword}
|
360 |
|
|
@item -a @var{keyword}
|
361 |
|
|
This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
|
362 |
|
|
argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
|
363 |
|
|
@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
|
364 |
|
|
@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
|
365 |
|
|
to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
|
366 |
|
|
|
367 |
|
|
@ifset I960
|
368 |
|
|
@cindex architectures
|
369 |
|
|
@kindex -A @var{arch}
|
370 |
|
|
@item -A @var{architecture}
|
371 |
|
|
@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
|
372 |
|
|
@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
|
373 |
|
|
In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
|
374 |
|
|
Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
|
375 |
|
|
@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
|
376 |
|
|
the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
|
377 |
|
|
archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
|
378 |
|
|
family}, for details.
|
379 |
|
|
|
380 |
|
|
Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
|
381 |
|
|
other architecture families.
|
382 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
383 |
|
|
|
384 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
385 |
|
|
@cindex binary input format
|
386 |
|
|
@kindex -b @var{format}
|
387 |
|
|
@kindex --format=@var{format}
|
388 |
|
|
@cindex input format
|
389 |
|
|
@cindex input format
|
390 |
|
|
@item -b @var{input-format}
|
391 |
|
|
@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
|
392 |
|
|
@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
|
393 |
|
|
file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
|
394 |
|
|
@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
|
395 |
|
|
that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
|
396 |
|
|
configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
|
397 |
|
|
to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
|
398 |
|
|
default input format the most usual format on each machine.
|
399 |
|
|
@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
|
400 |
|
|
supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
|
401 |
|
|
formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
|
402 |
|
|
@xref{BFD}.
|
403 |
|
|
|
404 |
|
|
You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
|
405 |
|
|
binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
|
406 |
|
|
linking object files of different formats), by including
|
407 |
|
|
@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
|
408 |
|
|
particular format.
|
409 |
|
|
|
410 |
|
|
The default format is taken from the environment variable
|
411 |
|
|
@code{GNUTARGET}.
|
412 |
|
|
@ifset UsesEnvVars
|
413 |
|
|
@xref{Environment}.
|
414 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
415 |
|
|
You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
|
416 |
|
|
@code{TARGET};
|
417 |
|
|
@ifclear man
|
418 |
|
|
see @ref{Format Commands}.
|
419 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
420 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
421 |
|
|
|
422 |
|
|
@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
|
423 |
|
|
@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
|
424 |
|
|
@cindex compatibility, MRI
|
425 |
|
|
@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
|
426 |
|
|
@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
|
427 |
|
|
For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
|
428 |
|
|
files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
|
429 |
|
|
@ifclear man
|
430 |
|
|
@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
|
431 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
432 |
|
|
@ifset man
|
433 |
|
|
the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
|
434 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
435 |
|
|
Introduce MRI script files with
|
436 |
|
|
the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
|
437 |
|
|
scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
|
438 |
|
|
If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
|
439 |
|
|
specified by any @samp{-L} options.
|
440 |
|
|
|
441 |
|
|
@cindex common allocation
|
442 |
|
|
@kindex -d
|
443 |
|
|
@kindex -dc
|
444 |
|
|
@kindex -dp
|
445 |
|
|
@item -d
|
446 |
|
|
@itemx -dc
|
447 |
|
|
@itemx -dp
|
448 |
|
|
These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
|
449 |
|
|
compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
|
450 |
|
|
even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
|
451 |
|
|
script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
|
452 |
|
|
@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
|
453 |
|
|
|
454 |
|
|
@cindex entry point, from command line
|
455 |
|
|
@kindex -e @var{entry}
|
456 |
|
|
@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
|
457 |
|
|
@item -e @var{entry}
|
458 |
|
|
@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
|
459 |
|
|
Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
|
460 |
|
|
program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
|
461 |
|
|
named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
|
462 |
|
|
and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
|
463 |
|
|
base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
|
464 |
|
|
@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
|
465 |
|
|
and other ways of specifying the entry point.
|
466 |
|
|
|
467 |
|
|
@kindex --exclude-libs
|
468 |
|
|
@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
|
469 |
|
|
Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
|
470 |
|
|
exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
|
471 |
|
|
@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
|
472 |
|
|
automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
|
473 |
|
|
port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
|
474 |
|
|
explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
|
475 |
|
|
option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
|
476 |
|
|
be treated as hidden.
|
477 |
|
|
|
478 |
|
|
@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
|
479 |
|
|
@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
|
480 |
|
|
Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
|
481 |
|
|
should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
|
482 |
|
|
into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
|
483 |
|
|
may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
|
484 |
|
|
used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
|
485 |
|
|
the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
|
486 |
|
|
match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
|
487 |
|
|
command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
|
488 |
|
|
of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
|
489 |
|
|
regardless of this option.
|
490 |
|
|
|
491 |
|
|
@cindex dynamic symbol table
|
492 |
|
|
@kindex -E
|
493 |
|
|
@kindex --export-dynamic
|
494 |
|
|
@kindex --no-export-dynamic
|
495 |
|
|
@item -E
|
496 |
|
|
@itemx --export-dynamic
|
497 |
|
|
@itemx --no-export-dynamic
|
498 |
|
|
When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
|
499 |
|
|
option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
|
500 |
|
|
all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
|
501 |
|
|
set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
|
502 |
|
|
|
503 |
|
|
If you do not use either of these options (or use the
|
504 |
|
|
@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
|
505 |
|
|
dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
|
506 |
|
|
referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
|
507 |
|
|
|
508 |
|
|
If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
|
509 |
|
|
back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
|
510 |
|
|
dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
|
511 |
|
|
linking the program itself.
|
512 |
|
|
|
513 |
|
|
You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
|
514 |
|
|
be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
|
515 |
|
|
See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
|
516 |
|
|
|
517 |
|
|
Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
|
518 |
|
|
support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
|
519 |
|
|
the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
|
520 |
|
|
|
521 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
522 |
|
|
@cindex big-endian objects
|
523 |
|
|
@cindex endianness
|
524 |
|
|
@kindex -EB
|
525 |
|
|
@item -EB
|
526 |
|
|
Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
|
527 |
|
|
|
528 |
|
|
@cindex little-endian objects
|
529 |
|
|
@kindex -EL
|
530 |
|
|
@item -EL
|
531 |
|
|
Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
|
532 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
533 |
|
|
|
534 |
|
|
@kindex -f @var{name}
|
535 |
|
|
@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
|
536 |
|
|
@item -f @var{name}
|
537 |
|
|
@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
|
538 |
|
|
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
|
539 |
|
|
to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
|
540 |
|
|
table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
|
541 |
|
|
symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
|
542 |
|
|
|
543 |
|
|
If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
|
544 |
|
|
run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
|
545 |
|
|
the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
|
546 |
|
|
first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
|
547 |
|
|
@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
|
548 |
|
|
in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
|
549 |
|
|
Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
|
550 |
|
|
implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
|
551 |
|
|
machine specific performance.
|
552 |
|
|
|
553 |
|
|
This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
|
554 |
|
|
will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
|
555 |
|
|
|
556 |
|
|
@kindex -F @var{name}
|
557 |
|
|
@kindex --filter=@var{name}
|
558 |
|
|
@item -F @var{name}
|
559 |
|
|
@itemx --filter=@var{name}
|
560 |
|
|
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
|
561 |
|
|
the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
|
562 |
|
|
of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
|
563 |
|
|
on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
|
564 |
|
|
|
565 |
|
|
If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
|
566 |
|
|
run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
|
567 |
|
|
dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
|
568 |
|
|
filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
|
569 |
|
|
found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
|
570 |
|
|
used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
|
571 |
|
|
@var{name}.
|
572 |
|
|
|
573 |
|
|
Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
|
574 |
|
|
toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
|
575 |
|
|
object files.
|
576 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
577 |
|
|
The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
|
578 |
|
|
@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
|
579 |
|
|
@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
|
580 |
|
|
environment variable.
|
581 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
582 |
|
|
The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
|
583 |
|
|
creating an ELF shared object.
|
584 |
|
|
|
585 |
|
|
@cindex finalization function
|
586 |
|
|
@kindex -fini=@var{name}
|
587 |
|
|
@item -fini=@var{name}
|
588 |
|
|
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
|
589 |
|
|
executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
|
590 |
|
|
address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
|
591 |
|
|
the function to call.
|
592 |
|
|
|
593 |
|
|
@kindex -g
|
594 |
|
|
@item -g
|
595 |
|
|
Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
|
596 |
|
|
|
597 |
|
|
@kindex -G @var{value}
|
598 |
|
|
@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
|
599 |
|
|
@cindex object size
|
600 |
|
|
@item -G @var{value}
|
601 |
|
|
@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
|
602 |
|
|
Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
|
603 |
|
|
@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
|
604 |
|
|
MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
|
605 |
|
|
sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
|
606 |
|
|
|
607 |
|
|
@cindex runtime library name
|
608 |
|
|
@kindex -h @var{name}
|
609 |
|
|
@kindex -soname=@var{name}
|
610 |
|
|
@item -h @var{name}
|
611 |
|
|
@itemx -soname=@var{name}
|
612 |
|
|
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
|
613 |
|
|
the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
|
614 |
|
|
which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
|
615 |
|
|
linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
|
616 |
|
|
field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
|
617 |
|
|
|
618 |
|
|
@kindex -i
|
619 |
|
|
@cindex incremental link
|
620 |
|
|
@item -i
|
621 |
|
|
Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
|
622 |
|
|
|
623 |
|
|
@cindex initialization function
|
624 |
|
|
@kindex -init=@var{name}
|
625 |
|
|
@item -init=@var{name}
|
626 |
|
|
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
|
627 |
|
|
executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
|
628 |
|
|
of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
|
629 |
|
|
function to call.
|
630 |
|
|
|
631 |
|
|
@cindex archive files, from cmd line
|
632 |
|
|
@kindex -l @var{namespec}
|
633 |
|
|
@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
|
634 |
|
|
@item -l @var{namespec}
|
635 |
|
|
@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
|
636 |
|
|
Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
|
637 |
|
|
list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
|
638 |
|
|
If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
|
639 |
|
|
will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
|
640 |
|
|
will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
|
641 |
|
|
|
642 |
|
|
On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
|
643 |
|
|
files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
|
644 |
|
|
and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
|
645 |
|
|
called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
|
646 |
|
|
@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
|
647 |
|
|
indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
|
648 |
|
|
to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
|
649 |
|
|
@var{filename}.
|
650 |
|
|
|
651 |
|
|
The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
|
652 |
|
|
specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
|
653 |
|
|
was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
|
654 |
|
|
command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
|
655 |
|
|
archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
|
656 |
|
|
the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
|
657 |
|
|
|
658 |
|
|
See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
|
659 |
|
|
archives multiple times.
|
660 |
|
|
|
661 |
|
|
You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
|
662 |
|
|
|
663 |
|
|
@ifset GENERIC
|
664 |
|
|
This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
|
665 |
|
|
if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
|
666 |
|
|
behaviour of the AIX linker.
|
667 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
668 |
|
|
|
669 |
|
|
@cindex search directory, from cmd line
|
670 |
|
|
@kindex -L @var{dir}
|
671 |
|
|
@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
|
672 |
|
|
@item -L @var{searchdir}
|
673 |
|
|
@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
|
674 |
|
|
Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
|
675 |
|
|
for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
|
676 |
|
|
option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
|
677 |
|
|
in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
|
678 |
|
|
on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
|
679 |
|
|
@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
|
680 |
|
|
order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
|
681 |
|
|
how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
|
682 |
|
|
option is specified.
|
683 |
|
|
|
684 |
|
|
If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
|
685 |
|
|
by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
|
686 |
|
|
|
687 |
|
|
@ifset UsesEnvVars
|
688 |
|
|
The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
|
689 |
|
|
@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
|
690 |
|
|
some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
|
691 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
692 |
|
|
|
693 |
|
|
The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
|
694 |
|
|
@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
|
695 |
|
|
at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
|
696 |
|
|
|
697 |
|
|
@cindex emulation
|
698 |
|
|
@kindex -m @var{emulation}
|
699 |
|
|
@item -m @var{emulation}
|
700 |
|
|
Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
|
701 |
|
|
emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
|
702 |
|
|
|
703 |
|
|
If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
|
704 |
|
|
@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
|
705 |
|
|
|
706 |
|
|
Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
|
707 |
|
|
configured.
|
708 |
|
|
|
709 |
|
|
@cindex link map
|
710 |
|
|
@kindex -M
|
711 |
|
|
@kindex --print-map
|
712 |
|
|
@item -M
|
713 |
|
|
@itemx --print-map
|
714 |
|
|
Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
|
715 |
|
|
information about the link, including the following:
|
716 |
|
|
|
717 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
718 |
|
|
@item
|
719 |
|
|
Where object files are mapped into memory.
|
720 |
|
|
@item
|
721 |
|
|
How common symbols are allocated.
|
722 |
|
|
@item
|
723 |
|
|
All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
|
724 |
|
|
which caused the archive member to be brought in.
|
725 |
|
|
@item
|
726 |
|
|
The values assigned to symbols.
|
727 |
|
|
|
728 |
|
|
Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
|
729 |
|
|
involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
|
730 |
|
|
have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
|
731 |
|
|
linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
|
732 |
|
|
of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
|
733 |
|
|
the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
|
734 |
|
|
linker script containing:
|
735 |
|
|
|
736 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
737 |
|
|
foo = 1
|
738 |
|
|
foo = foo * 4
|
739 |
|
|
foo = foo + 8
|
740 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
741 |
|
|
|
742 |
|
|
will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
|
743 |
|
|
option is used:
|
744 |
|
|
|
745 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
746 |
|
|
0x00000001 foo = 0x1
|
747 |
|
|
[0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
|
748 |
|
|
[0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
|
749 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
750 |
|
|
|
751 |
|
|
See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
|
752 |
|
|
scripts.
|
753 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
754 |
|
|
|
755 |
|
|
@kindex -n
|
756 |
|
|
@cindex read-only text
|
757 |
|
|
@cindex NMAGIC
|
758 |
|
|
@kindex --nmagic
|
759 |
|
|
@item -n
|
760 |
|
|
@itemx --nmagic
|
761 |
|
|
Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
|
762 |
|
|
@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
|
763 |
|
|
|
764 |
|
|
@kindex -N
|
765 |
|
|
@kindex --omagic
|
766 |
|
|
@cindex read/write from cmd line
|
767 |
|
|
@cindex OMAGIC
|
768 |
|
|
@item -N
|
769 |
|
|
@itemx --omagic
|
770 |
|
|
Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
|
771 |
|
|
not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
|
772 |
|
|
libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
|
773 |
|
|
mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
|
774 |
|
|
is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
|
775 |
|
|
specification published by Microsoft.
|
776 |
|
|
|
777 |
|
|
@kindex --no-omagic
|
778 |
|
|
@cindex OMAGIC
|
779 |
|
|
@item --no-omagic
|
780 |
|
|
This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
|
781 |
|
|
sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
|
782 |
|
|
be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
|
783 |
|
|
shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
|
784 |
|
|
|
785 |
|
|
@kindex -o @var{output}
|
786 |
|
|
@kindex --output=@var{output}
|
787 |
|
|
@cindex naming the output file
|
788 |
|
|
@item -o @var{output}
|
789 |
|
|
@itemx --output=@var{output}
|
790 |
|
|
Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
|
791 |
|
|
option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
|
792 |
|
|
script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
|
793 |
|
|
|
794 |
|
|
@kindex -O @var{level}
|
795 |
|
|
@cindex generating optimized output
|
796 |
|
|
@item -O @var{level}
|
797 |
|
|
If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
|
798 |
|
|
the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
|
799 |
|
|
should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
|
800 |
|
|
option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
|
801 |
|
|
the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
|
802 |
|
|
no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
|
803 |
|
|
of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
|
804 |
|
|
|
805 |
|
|
@kindex -q
|
806 |
|
|
@kindex --emit-relocs
|
807 |
|
|
@cindex retain relocations in final executable
|
808 |
|
|
@item -q
|
809 |
|
|
@itemx --emit-relocs
|
810 |
|
|
Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
|
811 |
|
|
Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
|
812 |
|
|
order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
|
813 |
|
|
in larger executables.
|
814 |
|
|
|
815 |
|
|
This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
|
816 |
|
|
|
817 |
|
|
@kindex --force-dynamic
|
818 |
|
|
@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
|
819 |
|
|
@item --force-dynamic
|
820 |
|
|
Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
|
821 |
|
|
to VxWorks targets.
|
822 |
|
|
|
823 |
|
|
@cindex partial link
|
824 |
|
|
@cindex relocatable output
|
825 |
|
|
@kindex -r
|
826 |
|
|
@kindex --relocatable
|
827 |
|
|
@item -r
|
828 |
|
|
@itemx --relocatable
|
829 |
|
|
Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
|
830 |
|
|
turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
|
831 |
|
|
linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
|
832 |
|
|
magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
|
833 |
|
|
@code{OMAGIC}.
|
834 |
|
|
@c ; see @option{-N}.
|
835 |
|
|
If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
|
836 |
|
|
linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
|
837 |
|
|
constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
|
838 |
|
|
|
839 |
|
|
When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
|
840 |
|
|
partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
|
841 |
|
|
relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
|
842 |
|
|
example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
|
843 |
|
|
with input files in other formats at all.
|
844 |
|
|
|
845 |
|
|
This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
|
846 |
|
|
|
847 |
|
|
@kindex -R @var{file}
|
848 |
|
|
@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
|
849 |
|
|
@cindex symbol-only input
|
850 |
|
|
@item -R @var{filename}
|
851 |
|
|
@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
|
852 |
|
|
Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
|
853 |
|
|
relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
|
854 |
|
|
to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
|
855 |
|
|
programs. You may use this option more than once.
|
856 |
|
|
|
857 |
|
|
For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
|
858 |
|
|
followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
|
859 |
|
|
the @option{-rpath} option.
|
860 |
|
|
|
861 |
|
|
@kindex -s
|
862 |
|
|
@kindex --strip-all
|
863 |
|
|
@cindex strip all symbols
|
864 |
|
|
@item -s
|
865 |
|
|
@itemx --strip-all
|
866 |
|
|
Omit all symbol information from the output file.
|
867 |
|
|
|
868 |
|
|
@kindex -S
|
869 |
|
|
@kindex --strip-debug
|
870 |
|
|
@cindex strip debugger symbols
|
871 |
|
|
@item -S
|
872 |
|
|
@itemx --strip-debug
|
873 |
|
|
Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
|
874 |
|
|
|
875 |
|
|
@kindex -t
|
876 |
|
|
@kindex --trace
|
877 |
|
|
@cindex input files, displaying
|
878 |
|
|
@item -t
|
879 |
|
|
@itemx --trace
|
880 |
|
|
Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
|
881 |
|
|
|
882 |
|
|
@kindex -T @var{script}
|
883 |
|
|
@kindex --script=@var{script}
|
884 |
|
|
@cindex script files
|
885 |
|
|
@item -T @var{scriptfile}
|
886 |
|
|
@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
|
887 |
|
|
Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
|
888 |
|
|
@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
|
889 |
|
|
@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
|
890 |
|
|
output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
|
891 |
|
|
the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
|
892 |
|
|
specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
|
893 |
|
|
options accumulate.
|
894 |
|
|
|
895 |
|
|
@kindex -dT @var{script}
|
896 |
|
|
@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
|
897 |
|
|
@cindex script files
|
898 |
|
|
@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
|
899 |
|
|
@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
|
900 |
|
|
Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
|
901 |
|
|
|
902 |
|
|
This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
|
903 |
|
|
processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
|
904 |
|
|
command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
|
905 |
|
|
@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
|
906 |
|
|
behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
|
907 |
|
|
command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
|
908 |
|
|
the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
|
909 |
|
|
@samp{gcc}).
|
910 |
|
|
|
911 |
|
|
@kindex -u @var{symbol}
|
912 |
|
|
@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
|
913 |
|
|
@cindex undefined symbol
|
914 |
|
|
@item -u @var{symbol}
|
915 |
|
|
@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
|
916 |
|
|
Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
|
917 |
|
|
symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
|
918 |
|
|
modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
|
919 |
|
|
different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
|
920 |
|
|
option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
|
921 |
|
|
|
922 |
|
|
@kindex -Ur
|
923 |
|
|
@cindex constructors
|
924 |
|
|
@item -Ur
|
925 |
|
|
For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
|
926 |
|
|
@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
|
927 |
|
|
turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
|
928 |
|
|
@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
|
929 |
|
|
It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
|
930 |
|
|
with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
|
931 |
|
|
be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
|
932 |
|
|
@samp{-r} for the others.
|
933 |
|
|
|
934 |
|
|
@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
|
935 |
|
|
@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
|
936 |
|
|
Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
|
937 |
|
|
@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
|
938 |
|
|
missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
|
939 |
|
|
specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
|
940 |
|
|
multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
|
941 |
|
|
input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
|
942 |
|
|
in a linker script.
|
943 |
|
|
|
944 |
|
|
@kindex -v
|
945 |
|
|
@kindex -V
|
946 |
|
|
@kindex --version
|
947 |
|
|
@cindex version
|
948 |
|
|
@item -v
|
949 |
|
|
@itemx --version
|
950 |
|
|
@itemx -V
|
951 |
|
|
Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
|
952 |
|
|
lists the supported emulations.
|
953 |
|
|
|
954 |
|
|
@kindex -x
|
955 |
|
|
@kindex --discard-all
|
956 |
|
|
@cindex deleting local symbols
|
957 |
|
|
@item -x
|
958 |
|
|
@itemx --discard-all
|
959 |
|
|
Delete all local symbols.
|
960 |
|
|
|
961 |
|
|
@kindex -X
|
962 |
|
|
@kindex --discard-locals
|
963 |
|
|
@cindex local symbols, deleting
|
964 |
|
|
@item -X
|
965 |
|
|
@itemx --discard-locals
|
966 |
|
|
Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
|
967 |
|
|
system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
|
968 |
|
|
or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
|
969 |
|
|
|
970 |
|
|
@kindex -y @var{symbol}
|
971 |
|
|
@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
|
972 |
|
|
@cindex symbol tracing
|
973 |
|
|
@item -y @var{symbol}
|
974 |
|
|
@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
|
975 |
|
|
Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
|
976 |
|
|
option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
|
977 |
|
|
to prepend an underscore.
|
978 |
|
|
|
979 |
|
|
This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
|
980 |
|
|
don't know where the reference is coming from.
|
981 |
|
|
|
982 |
|
|
@kindex -Y @var{path}
|
983 |
|
|
@item -Y @var{path}
|
984 |
|
|
Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
|
985 |
|
|
for Solaris compatibility.
|
986 |
|
|
|
987 |
|
|
@kindex -z @var{keyword}
|
988 |
|
|
@item -z @var{keyword}
|
989 |
|
|
The recognized keywords are:
|
990 |
|
|
@table @samp
|
991 |
|
|
|
992 |
|
|
@item combreloc
|
993 |
|
|
Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
|
994 |
|
|
lookup caching possible.
|
995 |
|
|
|
996 |
|
|
@item defs
|
997 |
|
|
Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
|
998 |
|
|
shared libraries are still allowed.
|
999 |
|
|
|
1000 |
|
|
@item execstack
|
1001 |
|
|
Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
|
1002 |
|
|
|
1003 |
|
|
@item initfirst
|
1004 |
|
|
This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
|
1005 |
|
|
It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
|
1006 |
|
|
before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
|
1007 |
|
|
the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
|
1008 |
|
|
the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
|
1009 |
|
|
objects.
|
1010 |
|
|
|
1011 |
|
|
@item interpose
|
1012 |
|
|
Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
|
1013 |
|
|
but the primary executable.
|
1014 |
|
|
|
1015 |
|
|
@item lazy
|
1016 |
|
|
When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
|
1017 |
|
|
dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
|
1018 |
|
|
the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
|
1019 |
|
|
Lazy binding is the default.
|
1020 |
|
|
|
1021 |
|
|
@item loadfltr
|
1022 |
|
|
Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
|
1023 |
|
|
runtime.
|
1024 |
|
|
|
1025 |
|
|
@item muldefs
|
1026 |
|
|
Allows multiple definitions.
|
1027 |
|
|
|
1028 |
|
|
@item nocombreloc
|
1029 |
|
|
Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
|
1030 |
|
|
|
1031 |
|
|
@item nocopyreloc
|
1032 |
|
|
Disables production of copy relocs.
|
1033 |
|
|
|
1034 |
|
|
@item nodefaultlib
|
1035 |
|
|
Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
|
1036 |
|
|
ignore any default library search paths.
|
1037 |
|
|
|
1038 |
|
|
@item nodelete
|
1039 |
|
|
Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
|
1040 |
|
|
|
1041 |
|
|
@item nodlopen
|
1042 |
|
|
Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
|
1043 |
|
|
|
1044 |
|
|
@item nodump
|
1045 |
|
|
Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
|
1046 |
|
|
|
1047 |
|
|
@item noexecstack
|
1048 |
|
|
Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
|
1049 |
|
|
|
1050 |
|
|
@item norelro
|
1051 |
|
|
Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
|
1052 |
|
|
|
1053 |
|
|
@item now
|
1054 |
|
|
When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
|
1055 |
|
|
dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
|
1056 |
|
|
when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
|
1057 |
|
|
deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
|
1058 |
|
|
first called.
|
1059 |
|
|
|
1060 |
|
|
@item origin
|
1061 |
|
|
Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
|
1062 |
|
|
|
1063 |
|
|
@item relro
|
1064 |
|
|
Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
|
1065 |
|
|
|
1066 |
|
|
@item max-page-size=@var{value}
|
1067 |
|
|
Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
|
1068 |
|
|
|
1069 |
|
|
@item common-page-size=@var{value}
|
1070 |
|
|
Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
|
1071 |
|
|
|
1072 |
|
|
@end table
|
1073 |
|
|
|
1074 |
|
|
Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
|
1075 |
|
|
|
1076 |
|
|
@kindex -(
|
1077 |
|
|
@cindex groups of archives
|
1078 |
|
|
@item -( @var{archives} -)
|
1079 |
|
|
@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
|
1080 |
|
|
The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
|
1081 |
|
|
either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
|
1082 |
|
|
|
1083 |
|
|
The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
|
1084 |
|
|
references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
|
1085 |
|
|
the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
|
1086 |
|
|
archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
|
1087 |
|
|
object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
|
1088 |
|
|
would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
|
1089 |
|
|
they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
|
1090 |
|
|
resolved.
|
1091 |
|
|
|
1092 |
|
|
Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
|
1093 |
|
|
it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
|
1094 |
|
|
more archives.
|
1095 |
|
|
|
1096 |
|
|
@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
|
1097 |
|
|
@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
|
1098 |
|
|
@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
|
1099 |
|
|
@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
|
1100 |
|
|
Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
|
1101 |
|
|
recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
|
1102 |
|
|
and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
|
1103 |
|
|
the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
|
1104 |
|
|
behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
|
1105 |
|
|
so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
|
1106 |
|
|
restore the old behaviour.
|
1107 |
|
|
|
1108 |
|
|
@kindex --as-needed
|
1109 |
|
|
@kindex --no-as-needed
|
1110 |
|
|
@item --as-needed
|
1111 |
|
|
@itemx --no-as-needed
|
1112 |
|
|
This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
|
1113 |
|
|
on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
|
1114 |
|
|
the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
|
1115 |
|
|
on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
|
1116 |
|
|
needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
|
1117 |
|
|
for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
|
1118 |
|
|
which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
|
1119 |
|
|
the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
|
1120 |
|
|
linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
|
1121 |
|
|
@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
|
1122 |
|
|
|
1123 |
|
|
@kindex --add-needed
|
1124 |
|
|
@kindex --no-add-needed
|
1125 |
|
|
@item --add-needed
|
1126 |
|
|
@itemx --no-add-needed
|
1127 |
|
|
This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
|
1128 |
|
|
DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
|
1129 |
|
|
the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
|
1130 |
|
|
a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
|
1131 |
|
|
@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
|
1132 |
|
|
for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
|
1133 |
|
|
the default behaviour.
|
1134 |
|
|
|
1135 |
|
|
@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
|
1136 |
|
|
@item -assert @var{keyword}
|
1137 |
|
|
This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
|
1138 |
|
|
|
1139 |
|
|
@kindex -Bdynamic
|
1140 |
|
|
@kindex -dy
|
1141 |
|
|
@kindex -call_shared
|
1142 |
|
|
@item -Bdynamic
|
1143 |
|
|
@itemx -dy
|
1144 |
|
|
@itemx -call_shared
|
1145 |
|
|
Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
|
1146 |
|
|
for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
|
1147 |
|
|
default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
|
1148 |
|
|
for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
|
1149 |
|
|
multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
|
1150 |
|
|
@option{-l} options which follow it.
|
1151 |
|
|
|
1152 |
|
|
@kindex -Bgroup
|
1153 |
|
|
@item -Bgroup
|
1154 |
|
|
Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
|
1155 |
|
|
section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
|
1156 |
|
|
object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
|
1157 |
|
|
@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
|
1158 |
|
|
only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
1159 |
|
|
|
1160 |
|
|
@kindex -Bstatic
|
1161 |
|
|
@kindex -dn
|
1162 |
|
|
@kindex -non_shared
|
1163 |
|
|
@kindex -static
|
1164 |
|
|
@item -Bstatic
|
1165 |
|
|
@itemx -dn
|
1166 |
|
|
@itemx -non_shared
|
1167 |
|
|
@itemx -static
|
1168 |
|
|
Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
|
1169 |
|
|
platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
|
1170 |
|
|
variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
|
1171 |
|
|
may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
|
1172 |
|
|
library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
|
1173 |
|
|
option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
|
1174 |
|
|
option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
|
1175 |
|
|
shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
|
1176 |
|
|
references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
|
1177 |
|
|
libraries.
|
1178 |
|
|
|
1179 |
|
|
@kindex -Bsymbolic
|
1180 |
|
|
@item -Bsymbolic
|
1181 |
|
|
When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
|
1182 |
|
|
definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
|
1183 |
|
|
for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
|
1184 |
|
|
within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
|
1185 |
|
|
platforms which support shared libraries.
|
1186 |
|
|
|
1187 |
|
|
@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
|
1188 |
|
|
@item -Bsymbolic-functions
|
1189 |
|
|
When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
|
1190 |
|
|
symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
|
1191 |
|
|
This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
|
1192 |
|
|
libraries.
|
1193 |
|
|
|
1194 |
|
|
@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
|
1195 |
|
|
@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
|
1196 |
|
|
Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
|
1197 |
|
|
typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
|
1198 |
|
|
global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
|
1199 |
|
|
within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
|
1200 |
|
|
to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
|
1201 |
|
|
in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
|
1202 |
|
|
which support shared libraries.
|
1203 |
|
|
|
1204 |
|
|
The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
|
1205 |
|
|
scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
|
1206 |
|
|
|
1207 |
|
|
@kindex --dynamic-list-data
|
1208 |
|
|
@item --dynamic-list-data
|
1209 |
|
|
Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
|
1210 |
|
|
|
1211 |
|
|
@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
|
1212 |
|
|
@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
|
1213 |
|
|
Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
|
1214 |
|
|
is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
|
1215 |
|
|
|
1216 |
|
|
@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
|
1217 |
|
|
@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
|
1218 |
|
|
Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
|
1219 |
|
|
|
1220 |
|
|
@kindex --check-sections
|
1221 |
|
|
@kindex --no-check-sections
|
1222 |
|
|
@item --check-sections
|
1223 |
|
|
@itemx --no-check-sections
|
1224 |
|
|
Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
|
1225 |
|
|
been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
|
1226 |
|
|
perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
|
1227 |
|
|
suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
|
1228 |
|
|
allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
|
1229 |
|
|
restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
|
1230 |
|
|
Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
|
1231 |
|
|
force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
|
1232 |
|
|
option.
|
1233 |
|
|
|
1234 |
|
|
@cindex cross reference table
|
1235 |
|
|
@kindex --cref
|
1236 |
|
|
@item --cref
|
1237 |
|
|
Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
|
1238 |
|
|
generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
|
1239 |
|
|
Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
|
1240 |
|
|
|
1241 |
|
|
The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
|
1242 |
|
|
easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
|
1243 |
|
|
sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
|
1244 |
|
|
symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
|
1245 |
|
|
definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
|
1246 |
|
|
|
1247 |
|
|
@cindex common allocation
|
1248 |
|
|
@kindex --no-define-common
|
1249 |
|
|
@item --no-define-common
|
1250 |
|
|
This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
|
1251 |
|
|
The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
|
1252 |
|
|
@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
|
1253 |
|
|
|
1254 |
|
|
The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
|
1255 |
|
|
the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
|
1256 |
|
|
of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
|
1257 |
|
|
forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
|
1258 |
|
|
Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
|
1259 |
|
|
from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
|
1260 |
|
|
This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
|
1261 |
|
|
and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
|
1262 |
|
|
duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
|
1263 |
|
|
paths for runtime symbol resolution.
|
1264 |
|
|
|
1265 |
|
|
@cindex symbols, from command line
|
1266 |
|
|
@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
|
1267 |
|
|
@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
|
1268 |
|
|
Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
|
1269 |
|
|
address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
|
1270 |
|
|
times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
|
1271 |
|
|
limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
|
1272 |
|
|
context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
|
1273 |
|
|
symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
|
1274 |
|
|
constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
|
1275 |
|
|
using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
|
1276 |
|
|
Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
|
1277 |
|
|
space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
|
1278 |
|
|
@var{expression}.
|
1279 |
|
|
|
1280 |
|
|
@cindex demangling, from command line
|
1281 |
|
|
@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
|
1282 |
|
|
@kindex --no-demangle
|
1283 |
|
|
@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
|
1284 |
|
|
@itemx --no-demangle
|
1285 |
|
|
These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
|
1286 |
|
|
and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
|
1287 |
|
|
present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
|
1288 |
|
|
underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
|
1289 |
|
|
mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
|
1290 |
|
|
different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
|
1291 |
|
|
to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
|
1292 |
|
|
demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
|
1293 |
|
|
is set. These options may be used to override the default.
|
1294 |
|
|
|
1295 |
|
|
@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
|
1296 |
|
|
@kindex -I@var{file}
|
1297 |
|
|
@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
|
1298 |
|
|
@item -I@var{file}
|
1299 |
|
|
@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
|
1300 |
|
|
Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
|
1301 |
|
|
generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
|
1302 |
|
|
linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
|
1303 |
|
|
doing.
|
1304 |
|
|
|
1305 |
|
|
@kindex --fatal-warnings
|
1306 |
|
|
@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
|
1307 |
|
|
@item --fatal-warnings
|
1308 |
|
|
@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
|
1309 |
|
|
Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
|
1310 |
|
|
with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
|
1311 |
|
|
|
1312 |
|
|
@kindex --force-exe-suffix
|
1313 |
|
|
@item --force-exe-suffix
|
1314 |
|
|
Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
|
1315 |
|
|
|
1316 |
|
|
If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
|
1317 |
|
|
@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
|
1318 |
|
|
the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
|
1319 |
|
|
option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
|
1320 |
|
|
Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
|
1321 |
|
|
it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
|
1322 |
|
|
|
1323 |
|
|
@kindex --gc-sections
|
1324 |
|
|
@kindex --no-gc-sections
|
1325 |
|
|
@cindex garbage collection
|
1326 |
|
|
@item --gc-sections
|
1327 |
|
|
@itemx --no-gc-sections
|
1328 |
|
|
Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
|
1329 |
|
|
targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
|
1330 |
|
|
performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
|
1331 |
|
|
@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
|
1332 |
|
|
|
1333 |
|
|
@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
|
1334 |
|
|
examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
|
1335 |
|
|
symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
|
1336 |
|
|
command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
|
1337 |
|
|
referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
|
1338 |
|
|
libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
|
1339 |
|
|
referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
|
1340 |
|
|
the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
|
1341 |
|
|
relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
|
1342 |
|
|
|
1343 |
|
|
This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
|
1344 |
|
|
@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
|
1345 |
|
|
specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
|
1346 |
|
|
a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
|
1347 |
|
|
|
1348 |
|
|
@kindex --print-gc-sections
|
1349 |
|
|
@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
|
1350 |
|
|
@cindex garbage collection
|
1351 |
|
|
@item --print-gc-sections
|
1352 |
|
|
@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
|
1353 |
|
|
List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
|
1354 |
|
|
printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
|
1355 |
|
|
collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
|
1356 |
|
|
default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
|
1357 |
|
|
be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
|
1358 |
|
|
line.
|
1359 |
|
|
|
1360 |
|
|
@cindex help
|
1361 |
|
|
@cindex usage
|
1362 |
|
|
@kindex --help
|
1363 |
|
|
@item --help
|
1364 |
|
|
Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
|
1365 |
|
|
|
1366 |
|
|
@kindex --target-help
|
1367 |
|
|
@item --target-help
|
1368 |
|
|
Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
|
1369 |
|
|
|
1370 |
|
|
@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
|
1371 |
|
|
@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
|
1372 |
|
|
Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
|
1373 |
|
|
@option{-M} option, above.
|
1374 |
|
|
|
1375 |
|
|
@cindex memory usage
|
1376 |
|
|
@kindex --no-keep-memory
|
1377 |
|
|
@item --no-keep-memory
|
1378 |
|
|
@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
|
1379 |
|
|
symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
|
1380 |
|
|
instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
|
1381 |
|
|
necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
|
1382 |
|
|
while linking a large executable.
|
1383 |
|
|
|
1384 |
|
|
@kindex --no-undefined
|
1385 |
|
|
@kindex -z defs
|
1386 |
|
|
@item --no-undefined
|
1387 |
|
|
@itemx -z defs
|
1388 |
|
|
Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
|
1389 |
|
|
is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
|
1390 |
|
|
The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
|
1391 |
|
|
behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
|
1392 |
|
|
libraries being linked in.
|
1393 |
|
|
|
1394 |
|
|
@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
|
1395 |
|
|
@kindex -z muldefs
|
1396 |
|
|
@item --allow-multiple-definition
|
1397 |
|
|
@itemx -z muldefs
|
1398 |
|
|
Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
|
1399 |
|
|
report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
|
1400 |
|
|
first definition will be used.
|
1401 |
|
|
|
1402 |
|
|
@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
|
1403 |
|
|
@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
|
1404 |
|
|
@item --allow-shlib-undefined
|
1405 |
|
|
@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
|
1406 |
|
|
Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
|
1407 |
|
|
This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
|
1408 |
|
|
determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
|
1409 |
|
|
shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
|
1410 |
|
|
how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
|
1411 |
|
|
|
1412 |
|
|
The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
|
1413 |
|
|
referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
|
1414 |
|
|
an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
|
1415 |
|
|
a shared library.
|
1416 |
|
|
|
1417 |
|
|
The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
|
1418 |
|
|
libraries specified at link time are that:
|
1419 |
|
|
|
1420 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
1421 |
|
|
@item
|
1422 |
|
|
A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
|
1423 |
|
|
that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
|
1424 |
|
|
resolvable at load time.
|
1425 |
|
|
@item
|
1426 |
|
|
There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
|
1427 |
|
|
symbols in shared libraries are normal.
|
1428 |
|
|
|
1429 |
|
|
The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
|
1430 |
|
|
select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
|
1431 |
|
|
architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
|
1432 |
|
|
appropriate memset function.
|
1433 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
1434 |
|
|
|
1435 |
|
|
@kindex --no-undefined-version
|
1436 |
|
|
@item --no-undefined-version
|
1437 |
|
|
Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
|
1438 |
|
|
it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
|
1439 |
|
|
will be issued instead.
|
1440 |
|
|
|
1441 |
|
|
@kindex --default-symver
|
1442 |
|
|
@item --default-symver
|
1443 |
|
|
Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
|
1444 |
|
|
exported symbols.
|
1445 |
|
|
|
1446 |
|
|
@kindex --default-imported-symver
|
1447 |
|
|
@item --default-imported-symver
|
1448 |
|
|
Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
|
1449 |
|
|
imported symbols.
|
1450 |
|
|
|
1451 |
|
|
@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
|
1452 |
|
|
@item --no-warn-mismatch
|
1453 |
|
|
Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
|
1454 |
|
|
files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
|
1455 |
|
|
been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
|
1456 |
|
|
This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
|
1457 |
|
|
errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
|
1458 |
|
|
have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
|
1459 |
|
|
inappropriate.
|
1460 |
|
|
|
1461 |
|
|
@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
|
1462 |
|
|
@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
|
1463 |
|
|
Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
|
1464 |
|
|
library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
|
1465 |
|
|
|
1466 |
|
|
@kindex --no-whole-archive
|
1467 |
|
|
@item --no-whole-archive
|
1468 |
|
|
Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
|
1469 |
|
|
archive files.
|
1470 |
|
|
|
1471 |
|
|
@cindex output file after errors
|
1472 |
|
|
@kindex --noinhibit-exec
|
1473 |
|
|
@item --noinhibit-exec
|
1474 |
|
|
Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
|
1475 |
|
|
Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
|
1476 |
|
|
errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
|
1477 |
|
|
when it issues any error whatsoever.
|
1478 |
|
|
|
1479 |
|
|
@kindex -nostdlib
|
1480 |
|
|
@item -nostdlib
|
1481 |
|
|
Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
|
1482 |
|
|
command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
|
1483 |
|
|
(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
|
1484 |
|
|
|
1485 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
1486 |
|
|
@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
|
1487 |
|
|
@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
|
1488 |
|
|
@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
|
1489 |
|
|
file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
|
1490 |
|
|
@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
|
1491 |
|
|
object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
|
1492 |
|
|
object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
|
1493 |
|
|
should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
|
1494 |
|
|
usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
|
1495 |
|
|
name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
|
1496 |
|
|
list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
|
1497 |
|
|
command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
|
1498 |
|
|
this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
|
1499 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
1500 |
|
|
|
1501 |
|
|
@kindex -pie
|
1502 |
|
|
@kindex --pic-executable
|
1503 |
|
|
@item -pie
|
1504 |
|
|
@itemx --pic-executable
|
1505 |
|
|
@cindex position independent executables
|
1506 |
|
|
Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
|
1507 |
|
|
ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
|
1508 |
|
|
libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
|
1509 |
|
|
address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
|
1510 |
|
|
normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
|
1511 |
|
|
defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
|
1512 |
|
|
|
1513 |
|
|
@kindex -qmagic
|
1514 |
|
|
@item -qmagic
|
1515 |
|
|
This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
|
1516 |
|
|
|
1517 |
|
|
@kindex -Qy
|
1518 |
|
|
@item -Qy
|
1519 |
|
|
This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
|
1520 |
|
|
|
1521 |
|
|
@kindex --relax
|
1522 |
|
|
@cindex synthesizing linker
|
1523 |
|
|
@cindex relaxing addressing modes
|
1524 |
|
|
@item --relax
|
1525 |
|
|
An option with machine dependent effects.
|
1526 |
|
|
@ifset GENERIC
|
1527 |
|
|
This option is only supported on a few targets.
|
1528 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1529 |
|
|
@ifset H8300
|
1530 |
|
|
@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
|
1531 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1532 |
|
|
@ifset I960
|
1533 |
|
|
@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
|
1534 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1535 |
|
|
@ifset XTENSA
|
1536 |
|
|
@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
|
1537 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1538 |
|
|
@ifset M68HC11
|
1539 |
|
|
@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
|
1540 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1541 |
|
|
@ifset POWERPC
|
1542 |
|
|
@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
|
1543 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1544 |
|
|
|
1545 |
|
|
On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
|
1546 |
|
|
optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
|
1547 |
|
|
in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
|
1548 |
|
|
instructions in the output object file.
|
1549 |
|
|
|
1550 |
|
|
On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
|
1551 |
|
|
debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
|
1552 |
|
|
@ifset GENERIC
|
1553 |
|
|
This is known to be
|
1554 |
|
|
the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
|
1555 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1556 |
|
|
|
1557 |
|
|
@ifset GENERIC
|
1558 |
|
|
On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
|
1559 |
|
|
but ignored.
|
1560 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1561 |
|
|
|
1562 |
|
|
@cindex retaining specified symbols
|
1563 |
|
|
@cindex stripping all but some symbols
|
1564 |
|
|
@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
|
1565 |
|
|
@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
|
1566 |
|
|
@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
|
1567 |
|
|
Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
|
1568 |
|
|
discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
|
1569 |
|
|
symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
|
1570 |
|
|
@ifset GENERIC
|
1571 |
|
|
(such as VxWorks)
|
1572 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1573 |
|
|
where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
|
1574 |
|
|
run-time memory.
|
1575 |
|
|
|
1576 |
|
|
@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
|
1577 |
|
|
or symbols needed for relocations.
|
1578 |
|
|
|
1579 |
|
|
You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
|
1580 |
|
|
line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
|
1581 |
|
|
|
1582 |
|
|
@ifset GENERIC
|
1583 |
|
|
@item -rpath=@var{dir}
|
1584 |
|
|
@cindex runtime library search path
|
1585 |
|
|
@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
|
1586 |
|
|
Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
|
1587 |
|
|
linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
|
1588 |
|
|
arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
|
1589 |
|
|
them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
|
1590 |
|
|
also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
|
1591 |
|
|
objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
|
1592 |
|
|
@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
|
1593 |
|
|
ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
|
1594 |
|
|
@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
|
1595 |
|
|
|
1596 |
|
|
The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
|
1597 |
|
|
SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
|
1598 |
|
|
@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
|
1599 |
|
|
runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
|
1600 |
|
|
options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
|
1601 |
|
|
gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
|
1602 |
|
|
file systems.
|
1603 |
|
|
|
1604 |
|
|
For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
|
1605 |
|
|
followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
|
1606 |
|
|
the @option{-rpath} option.
|
1607 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1608 |
|
|
|
1609 |
|
|
@ifset GENERIC
|
1610 |
|
|
@cindex link-time runtime library search path
|
1611 |
|
|
@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
|
1612 |
|
|
@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
|
1613 |
|
|
When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
|
1614 |
|
|
happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
|
1615 |
|
|
of the input files.
|
1616 |
|
|
|
1617 |
|
|
When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
|
1618 |
|
|
non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
|
1619 |
|
|
shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
|
1620 |
|
|
explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
|
1621 |
|
|
specifies the first set of directories to search. The
|
1622 |
|
|
@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
|
1623 |
|
|
either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
|
1624 |
|
|
appearing multiple times.
|
1625 |
|
|
|
1626 |
|
|
This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
|
1627 |
|
|
that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
|
1628 |
|
|
is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
|
1629 |
|
|
runtime linker would do.
|
1630 |
|
|
|
1631 |
|
|
The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
|
1632 |
|
|
libraries:
|
1633 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
1634 |
|
|
@item
|
1635 |
|
|
Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
|
1636 |
|
|
@item
|
1637 |
|
|
Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
|
1638 |
|
|
between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
|
1639 |
|
|
specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
|
1640 |
|
|
used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
|
1641 |
|
|
at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
|
1642 |
|
|
by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
|
1643 |
|
|
the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
|
1644 |
|
|
@item
|
1645 |
|
|
On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
|
1646 |
|
|
@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
|
1647 |
|
|
environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
|
1648 |
|
|
@item
|
1649 |
|
|
On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
|
1650 |
|
|
directories specified using @option{-L} options.
|
1651 |
|
|
@item
|
1652 |
|
|
For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
|
1653 |
|
|
variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
|
1654 |
|
|
@item
|
1655 |
|
|
For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
|
1656 |
|
|
@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
|
1657 |
|
|
libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
|
1658 |
|
|
@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
|
1659 |
|
|
@item
|
1660 |
|
|
The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
|
1661 |
|
|
@item
|
1662 |
|
|
For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
|
1663 |
|
|
exists, the list of directories found in that file.
|
1664 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
1665 |
|
|
|
1666 |
|
|
If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
|
1667 |
|
|
warning and continue with the link.
|
1668 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
1669 |
|
|
|
1670 |
|
|
@kindex -shared
|
1671 |
|
|
@kindex -Bshareable
|
1672 |
|
|
@item -shared
|
1673 |
|
|
@itemx -Bshareable
|
1674 |
|
|
@cindex shared libraries
|
1675 |
|
|
Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
|
1676 |
|
|
and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
|
1677 |
|
|
shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
|
1678 |
|
|
undefined symbols in the link.
|
1679 |
|
|
|
1680 |
|
|
@kindex --sort-common
|
1681 |
|
|
@item --sort-common
|
1682 |
|
|
@itemx --sort-common=ascending
|
1683 |
|
|
@itemx --sort-common=descending
|
1684 |
|
|
This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
|
1685 |
|
|
ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
|
1686 |
|
|
sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
|
1687 |
|
|
eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
|
1688 |
|
|
between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
|
1689 |
|
|
specified, then descending order is assumed.
|
1690 |
|
|
|
1691 |
|
|
@kindex --sort-section=name
|
1692 |
|
|
@item --sort-section=name
|
1693 |
|
|
This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
|
1694 |
|
|
patterns in the linker script.
|
1695 |
|
|
|
1696 |
|
|
@kindex --sort-section=alignment
|
1697 |
|
|
@item --sort-section=alignment
|
1698 |
|
|
This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
|
1699 |
|
|
patterns in the linker script.
|
1700 |
|
|
|
1701 |
|
|
@kindex --split-by-file
|
1702 |
|
|
@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
|
1703 |
|
|
Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
|
1704 |
|
|
each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
|
1705 |
|
|
size of 1 if not given.
|
1706 |
|
|
|
1707 |
|
|
@kindex --split-by-reloc
|
1708 |
|
|
@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
|
1709 |
|
|
Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
|
1710 |
|
|
output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
|
1711 |
|
|
This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
|
1712 |
|
|
certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
|
1713 |
|
|
cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
|
1714 |
|
|
that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
|
1715 |
|
|
support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
|
1716 |
|
|
input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
|
1717 |
|
|
more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
|
1718 |
|
|
many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
|
1719 |
|
|
|
1720 |
|
|
@kindex --stats
|
1721 |
|
|
@item --stats
|
1722 |
|
|
Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
|
1723 |
|
|
as execution time and memory usage.
|
1724 |
|
|
|
1725 |
|
|
@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
|
1726 |
|
|
@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
|
1727 |
|
|
Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
|
1728 |
|
|
configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
|
1729 |
|
|
that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
|
1730 |
|
|
|
1731 |
|
|
@kindex --traditional-format
|
1732 |
|
|
@cindex traditional format
|
1733 |
|
|
@item --traditional-format
|
1734 |
|
|
For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
|
1735 |
|
|
the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
|
1736 |
|
|
use the traditional format instead.
|
1737 |
|
|
|
1738 |
|
|
@cindex dbx
|
1739 |
|
|
For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
|
1740 |
|
|
symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
|
1741 |
|
|
full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
|
1742 |
|
|
@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
|
1743 |
|
|
trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
|
1744 |
|
|
combine duplicate entries.
|
1745 |
|
|
|
1746 |
|
|
@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
|
1747 |
|
|
@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
|
1748 |
|
|
Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
|
1749 |
|
|
address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
|
1750 |
|
|
times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
|
1751 |
|
|
line.
|
1752 |
|
|
@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
|
1753 |
|
|
for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
|
1754 |
|
|
@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
|
1755 |
|
|
should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
|
1756 |
|
|
sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
|
1757 |
|
|
|
1758 |
|
|
@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
|
1759 |
|
|
@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
|
1760 |
|
|
@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
|
1761 |
|
|
@cindex segment origins, cmd line
|
1762 |
|
|
@item -Tbss=@var{org}
|
1763 |
|
|
@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
|
1764 |
|
|
@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
|
1765 |
|
|
Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
|
1766 |
|
|
@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
|
1767 |
|
|
|
1768 |
|
|
@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
|
1769 |
|
|
@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
|
1770 |
|
|
@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
|
1771 |
|
|
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
|
1772 |
|
|
of the first byte of the text segment.
|
1773 |
|
|
|
1774 |
|
|
@kindex --unresolved-symbols
|
1775 |
|
|
@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
|
1776 |
|
|
Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
|
1777 |
|
|
values for @samp{method}:
|
1778 |
|
|
|
1779 |
|
|
@table @samp
|
1780 |
|
|
@item ignore-all
|
1781 |
|
|
Do not report any unresolved symbols.
|
1782 |
|
|
|
1783 |
|
|
@item report-all
|
1784 |
|
|
Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
|
1785 |
|
|
|
1786 |
|
|
@item ignore-in-object-files
|
1787 |
|
|
Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
|
1788 |
|
|
ignore them if they come from regular object files.
|
1789 |
|
|
|
1790 |
|
|
@item ignore-in-shared-libs
|
1791 |
|
|
Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
|
1792 |
|
|
ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
|
1793 |
|
|
when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
|
1794 |
|
|
libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
|
1795 |
|
|
command line.
|
1796 |
|
|
@end table
|
1797 |
|
|
|
1798 |
|
|
The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
|
1799 |
|
|
by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
|
1800 |
|
|
|
1801 |
|
|
Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
|
1802 |
|
|
unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
|
1803 |
|
|
can change this to a warning.
|
1804 |
|
|
|
1805 |
|
|
@kindex --verbose
|
1806 |
|
|
@cindex verbose
|
1807 |
|
|
@item --dll-verbose
|
1808 |
|
|
@itemx --verbose
|
1809 |
|
|
Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
|
1810 |
|
|
supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
|
1811 |
|
|
the linker script being used by the linker.
|
1812 |
|
|
|
1813 |
|
|
@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
|
1814 |
|
|
@cindex version script, symbol versions
|
1815 |
|
|
@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
|
1816 |
|
|
Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
|
1817 |
|
|
used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
|
1818 |
|
|
about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
|
1819 |
|
|
is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
|
1820 |
|
|
see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
|
1821 |
|
|
use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
|
1822 |
|
|
symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
|
1823 |
|
|
@xref{WIN32}.
|
1824 |
|
|
|
1825 |
|
|
@kindex --warn-common
|
1826 |
|
|
@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
|
1827 |
|
|
@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
|
1828 |
|
|
@item --warn-common
|
1829 |
|
|
Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
|
1830 |
|
|
a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
|
1831 |
|
|
but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
|
1832 |
|
|
you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
|
1833 |
|
|
Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
|
1834 |
|
|
warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
|
1835 |
|
|
|
1836 |
|
|
There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
|
1837 |
|
|
|
1838 |
|
|
@table @samp
|
1839 |
|
|
@item int i = 1;
|
1840 |
|
|
A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
|
1841 |
|
|
file.
|
1842 |
|
|
|
1843 |
|
|
@item extern int i;
|
1844 |
|
|
An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
|
1845 |
|
|
There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
|
1846 |
|
|
variable somewhere.
|
1847 |
|
|
|
1848 |
|
|
@item int i;
|
1849 |
|
|
A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
|
1850 |
|
|
variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
|
1851 |
|
|
The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
|
1852 |
|
|
single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
|
1853 |
|
|
size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
|
1854 |
|
|
a definition of the same variable.
|
1855 |
|
|
@end table
|
1856 |
|
|
|
1857 |
|
|
The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
|
1858 |
|
|
Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
|
1859 |
|
|
just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
|
1860 |
|
|
encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
|
1861 |
|
|
a common symbol.
|
1862 |
|
|
|
1863 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
1864 |
|
|
@item
|
1865 |
|
|
Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
|
1866 |
|
|
definition for the symbol.
|
1867 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
1868 |
|
|
@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
|
1869 |
|
|
overridden by definition
|
1870 |
|
|
@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
|
1871 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
1872 |
|
|
|
1873 |
|
|
@item
|
1874 |
|
|
Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
|
1875 |
|
|
the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
|
1876 |
|
|
except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
|
1877 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
1878 |
|
|
@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
|
1879 |
|
|
overriding common
|
1880 |
|
|
@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
|
1881 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
1882 |
|
|
|
1883 |
|
|
@item
|
1884 |
|
|
Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
|
1885 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
1886 |
|
|
@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
|
1887 |
|
|
of `@var{symbol}'
|
1888 |
|
|
@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
|
1889 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
1890 |
|
|
|
1891 |
|
|
@item
|
1892 |
|
|
Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
|
1893 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
1894 |
|
|
@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
|
1895 |
|
|
overridden by larger common
|
1896 |
|
|
@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
|
1897 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
1898 |
|
|
|
1899 |
|
|
@item
|
1900 |
|
|
Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
|
1901 |
|
|
the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
|
1902 |
|
|
encountered in a different order.
|
1903 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
1904 |
|
|
@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
|
1905 |
|
|
overriding smaller common
|
1906 |
|
|
@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
|
1907 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
1908 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
1909 |
|
|
|
1910 |
|
|
@kindex --warn-constructors
|
1911 |
|
|
@item --warn-constructors
|
1912 |
|
|
Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
|
1913 |
|
|
object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
|
1914 |
|
|
detect the use of global constructors.
|
1915 |
|
|
|
1916 |
|
|
@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
|
1917 |
|
|
@item --warn-multiple-gp
|
1918 |
|
|
Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
|
1919 |
|
|
This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
|
1920 |
|
|
Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
|
1921 |
|
|
section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
|
1922 |
|
|
of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
|
1923 |
|
|
base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
|
1924 |
|
|
base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
|
1925 |
|
|
bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
|
1926 |
|
|
large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
|
1927 |
|
|
values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
|
1928 |
|
|
option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
|
1929 |
|
|
|
1930 |
|
|
@kindex --warn-once
|
1931 |
|
|
@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
|
1932 |
|
|
@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
|
1933 |
|
|
@item --warn-once
|
1934 |
|
|
Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
|
1935 |
|
|
which refers to it.
|
1936 |
|
|
|
1937 |
|
|
@kindex --warn-section-align
|
1938 |
|
|
@cindex warnings, on section alignment
|
1939 |
|
|
@cindex section alignment, warnings on
|
1940 |
|
|
@item --warn-section-align
|
1941 |
|
|
Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
|
1942 |
|
|
alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
|
1943 |
|
|
The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
|
1944 |
|
|
is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
|
1945 |
|
|
the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
|
1946 |
|
|
|
1947 |
|
|
@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
|
1948 |
|
|
@item --warn-shared-textrel
|
1949 |
|
|
Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
|
1950 |
|
|
|
1951 |
|
|
@kindex --warn-alternate-em
|
1952 |
|
|
@item --warn-alternate-em
|
1953 |
|
|
Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
|
1954 |
|
|
|
1955 |
|
|
@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
|
1956 |
|
|
@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
|
1957 |
|
|
If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
|
1958 |
|
|
@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
|
1959 |
|
|
This option makes it generate a warning instead.
|
1960 |
|
|
|
1961 |
|
|
@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
|
1962 |
|
|
@item --error-unresolved-symbols
|
1963 |
|
|
This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
|
1964 |
|
|
it is reporting unresolved symbols.
|
1965 |
|
|
|
1966 |
|
|
@kindex --whole-archive
|
1967 |
|
|
@cindex including an entire archive
|
1968 |
|
|
@item --whole-archive
|
1969 |
|
|
For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
|
1970 |
|
|
@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
|
1971 |
|
|
in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
|
1972 |
|
|
files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
|
1973 |
|
|
library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
|
1974 |
|
|
library. This option may be used more than once.
|
1975 |
|
|
|
1976 |
|
|
Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
|
1977 |
|
|
about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
|
1978 |
|
|
Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
|
1979 |
|
|
list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
|
1980 |
|
|
your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
|
1981 |
|
|
|
1982 |
|
|
@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
|
1983 |
|
|
@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
|
1984 |
|
|
Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
|
1985 |
|
|
@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
|
1986 |
|
|
undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
|
1987 |
|
|
@var{symbol}.
|
1988 |
|
|
|
1989 |
|
|
This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
|
1990 |
|
|
wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
|
1991 |
|
|
wishes to call the system function, it should call
|
1992 |
|
|
@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
|
1993 |
|
|
|
1994 |
|
|
Here is a trivial example:
|
1995 |
|
|
|
1996 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
1997 |
|
|
void *
|
1998 |
|
|
__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
|
1999 |
|
|
@{
|
2000 |
|
|
printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
|
2001 |
|
|
return __real_malloc (c);
|
2002 |
|
|
@}
|
2003 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2004 |
|
|
|
2005 |
|
|
If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
|
2006 |
|
|
all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
|
2007 |
|
|
instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
|
2008 |
|
|
call the real @code{malloc} function.
|
2009 |
|
|
|
2010 |
|
|
You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
|
2011 |
|
|
links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
|
2012 |
|
|
you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
|
2013 |
|
|
file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
|
2014 |
|
|
call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
|
2015 |
|
|
|
2016 |
|
|
@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
|
2017 |
|
|
@item --eh-frame-hdr
|
2018 |
|
|
Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
|
2019 |
|
|
@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
|
2020 |
|
|
|
2021 |
|
|
@kindex --enable-new-dtags
|
2022 |
|
|
@kindex --disable-new-dtags
|
2023 |
|
|
@item --enable-new-dtags
|
2024 |
|
|
@itemx --disable-new-dtags
|
2025 |
|
|
This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
|
2026 |
|
|
systems may not understand them. If you specify
|
2027 |
|
|
@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
|
2028 |
|
|
If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
|
2029 |
|
|
created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
|
2030 |
|
|
those options are only available for ELF systems.
|
2031 |
|
|
|
2032 |
|
|
@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
|
2033 |
|
|
@item --hash-size=@var{number}
|
2034 |
|
|
Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
|
2035 |
|
|
close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
|
2036 |
|
|
time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
|
2037 |
|
|
increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
|
2038 |
|
|
value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
|
2039 |
|
|
|
2040 |
|
|
@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
|
2041 |
|
|
@item --hash-style=@var{style}
|
2042 |
|
|
Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
|
2043 |
|
|
@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
|
2044 |
|
|
new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
|
2045 |
|
|
the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
|
2046 |
|
|
hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
|
2047 |
|
|
|
2048 |
|
|
@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
|
2049 |
|
|
@item --reduce-memory-overheads
|
2050 |
|
|
This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
|
2051 |
|
|
linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
|
2052 |
|
|
for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
|
2053 |
|
|
about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
|
2054 |
|
|
|
2055 |
|
|
Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
|
2056 |
|
|
1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
|
2057 |
|
|
run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
|
2058 |
|
|
has been used.
|
2059 |
|
|
|
2060 |
|
|
The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
|
2061 |
|
|
enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
|
2062 |
|
|
|
2063 |
|
|
@kindex --build-id
|
2064 |
|
|
@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
|
2065 |
|
|
@item --build-id
|
2066 |
|
|
@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
|
2067 |
|
|
Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
|
2068 |
|
|
The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
|
2069 |
|
|
file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
|
2070 |
|
|
@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
|
2071 |
|
|
parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
|
2072 |
|
|
@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
|
2073 |
|
|
@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
|
2074 |
|
|
an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
|
2075 |
|
|
characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
|
2076 |
|
|
omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
|
2077 |
|
|
|
2078 |
|
|
The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
|
2079 |
|
|
that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
|
2080 |
|
|
unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
|
2081 |
|
|
to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
|
2082 |
|
|
file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
|
2083 |
|
|
string identifying the original linked file does not change.
|
2084 |
|
|
|
2085 |
|
|
Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
|
2086 |
|
|
@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
|
2087 |
|
|
@end table
|
2088 |
|
|
|
2089 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2090 |
|
|
|
2091 |
|
|
@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
|
2092 |
|
|
|
2093 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS
|
2094 |
|
|
|
2095 |
|
|
The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
|
2096 |
|
|
the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
|
2097 |
|
|
normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
|
2098 |
|
|
use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
|
2099 |
|
|
@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
|
2100 |
|
|
like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
|
2101 |
|
|
symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
|
2102 |
|
|
object file).
|
2103 |
|
|
|
2104 |
|
|
In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
|
2105 |
|
|
support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
|
2106 |
|
|
PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
|
2107 |
|
|
values by either a space or an equals sign.
|
2108 |
|
|
|
2109 |
|
|
@table @gcctabopt
|
2110 |
|
|
|
2111 |
|
|
@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
|
2112 |
|
|
@item --add-stdcall-alias
|
2113 |
|
|
If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
|
2114 |
|
|
as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
|
2115 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2116 |
|
|
|
2117 |
|
|
@kindex --base-file
|
2118 |
|
|
@item --base-file @var{file}
|
2119 |
|
|
Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
|
2120 |
|
|
addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
|
2121 |
|
|
@file{dlltool}.
|
2122 |
|
|
[This is an i386 PE specific option]
|
2123 |
|
|
|
2124 |
|
|
@kindex --dll
|
2125 |
|
|
@item --dll
|
2126 |
|
|
Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
|
2127 |
|
|
@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
|
2128 |
|
|
file.
|
2129 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2130 |
|
|
|
2131 |
|
|
@kindex --enable-long-section-names
|
2132 |
|
|
@kindex --disable-long-section-names
|
2133 |
|
|
@item --enable-long-section-names
|
2134 |
|
|
@itemx --disable-long-section-names
|
2135 |
|
|
The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
|
2136 |
|
|
the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
|
2137 |
|
|
for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
|
2138 |
|
|
fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
|
2139 |
|
|
to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
|
2140 |
|
|
allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
|
2141 |
|
|
disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
|
2142 |
|
|
generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
|
2143 |
|
|
as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
|
2144 |
|
|
with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
|
2145 |
|
|
GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
|
2146 |
|
|
information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
|
2147 |
|
|
option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
|
2148 |
|
|
section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
|
2149 |
|
|
when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
|
2150 |
|
|
image and not stripping symbols.
|
2151 |
|
|
[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
|
2152 |
|
|
|
2153 |
|
|
@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
|
2154 |
|
|
@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
|
2155 |
|
|
@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
|
2156 |
|
|
@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
|
2157 |
|
|
If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
|
2158 |
|
|
do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
|
2159 |
|
|
only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
|
2160 |
|
|
resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
|
2161 |
|
|
undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
|
2162 |
|
|
@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
|
2163 |
|
|
to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
|
2164 |
|
|
warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
|
2165 |
|
|
import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
|
2166 |
|
|
to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
|
2167 |
|
|
feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
|
2168 |
|
|
@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
|
2169 |
|
|
mismatches are considered to be errors.
|
2170 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2171 |
|
|
|
2172 |
|
|
@cindex DLLs, creating
|
2173 |
|
|
@kindex --export-all-symbols
|
2174 |
|
|
@item --export-all-symbols
|
2175 |
|
|
If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
|
2176 |
|
|
be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
|
2177 |
|
|
otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
|
2178 |
|
|
explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
|
2179 |
|
|
attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
|
2180 |
|
|
option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
|
2181 |
|
|
@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
|
2182 |
|
|
@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
|
2183 |
|
|
exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
|
2184 |
|
|
re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
|
2185 |
|
|
such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
|
2186 |
|
|
@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
|
2187 |
|
|
@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
|
2188 |
|
|
Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
|
2189 |
|
|
not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
|
2190 |
|
|
extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
|
2191 |
|
|
(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
|
2192 |
|
|
These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
|
2193 |
|
|
@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
|
2194 |
|
|
@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
|
2195 |
|
|
@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
|
2196 |
|
|
@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
|
2197 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2198 |
|
|
|
2199 |
|
|
@kindex --exclude-symbols
|
2200 |
|
|
@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
|
2201 |
|
|
Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
|
2202 |
|
|
exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
|
2203 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2204 |
|
|
|
2205 |
|
|
@kindex --file-alignment
|
2206 |
|
|
@item --file-alignment
|
2207 |
|
|
Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
|
2208 |
|
|
file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
|
2209 |
|
|
512.
|
2210 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2211 |
|
|
|
2212 |
|
|
@cindex heap size
|
2213 |
|
|
@kindex --heap
|
2214 |
|
|
@item --heap @var{reserve}
|
2215 |
|
|
@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
|
2216 |
|
|
Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
|
2217 |
|
|
to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
|
2218 |
|
|
committed.
|
2219 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2220 |
|
|
|
2221 |
|
|
@cindex image base
|
2222 |
|
|
@kindex --image-base
|
2223 |
|
|
@item --image-base @var{value}
|
2224 |
|
|
Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
|
2225 |
|
|
the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
|
2226 |
|
|
is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
|
2227 |
|
|
your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
|
2228 |
|
|
other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
|
2229 |
|
|
for dlls.
|
2230 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2231 |
|
|
|
2232 |
|
|
@kindex --kill-at
|
2233 |
|
|
@item --kill-at
|
2234 |
|
|
If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
|
2235 |
|
|
symbols before they are exported.
|
2236 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2237 |
|
|
|
2238 |
|
|
@kindex --large-address-aware
|
2239 |
|
|
@item --large-address-aware
|
2240 |
|
|
If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
|
2241 |
|
|
header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
|
2242 |
|
|
greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
|
2243 |
|
|
or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
|
2244 |
|
|
section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
|
2245 |
|
|
[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
|
2246 |
|
|
|
2247 |
|
|
@kindex --major-image-version
|
2248 |
|
|
@item --major-image-version @var{value}
|
2249 |
|
|
Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
|
2250 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2251 |
|
|
|
2252 |
|
|
@kindex --major-os-version
|
2253 |
|
|
@item --major-os-version @var{value}
|
2254 |
|
|
Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
|
2255 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2256 |
|
|
|
2257 |
|
|
@kindex --major-subsystem-version
|
2258 |
|
|
@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
|
2259 |
|
|
Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
|
2260 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2261 |
|
|
|
2262 |
|
|
@kindex --minor-image-version
|
2263 |
|
|
@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
|
2264 |
|
|
Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
|
2265 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2266 |
|
|
|
2267 |
|
|
@kindex --minor-os-version
|
2268 |
|
|
@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
|
2269 |
|
|
Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
|
2270 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2271 |
|
|
|
2272 |
|
|
@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
|
2273 |
|
|
@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
|
2274 |
|
|
Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
|
2275 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2276 |
|
|
|
2277 |
|
|
@cindex DEF files, creating
|
2278 |
|
|
@cindex DLLs, creating
|
2279 |
|
|
@kindex --output-def
|
2280 |
|
|
@item --output-def @var{file}
|
2281 |
|
|
The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
|
2282 |
|
|
file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
|
2283 |
|
|
(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
|
2284 |
|
|
library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
|
2285 |
|
|
automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
|
2286 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2287 |
|
|
|
2288 |
|
|
@cindex DLLs, creating
|
2289 |
|
|
@kindex --out-implib
|
2290 |
|
|
@item --out-implib @var{file}
|
2291 |
|
|
The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
|
2292 |
|
|
import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
|
2293 |
|
|
import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
|
2294 |
|
|
may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
|
2295 |
|
|
makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
|
2296 |
|
|
creation step.
|
2297 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2298 |
|
|
|
2299 |
|
|
@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
|
2300 |
|
|
@item --enable-auto-image-base
|
2301 |
|
|
Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
|
2302 |
|
|
using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
|
2303 |
|
|
from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
|
2304 |
|
|
collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
|
2305 |
|
|
avoided.
|
2306 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2307 |
|
|
|
2308 |
|
|
@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
|
2309 |
|
|
@item --disable-auto-image-base
|
2310 |
|
|
Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
|
2311 |
|
|
user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
|
2312 |
|
|
default.
|
2313 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2314 |
|
|
|
2315 |
|
|
@cindex DLLs, linking to
|
2316 |
|
|
@kindex --dll-search-prefix
|
2317 |
|
|
@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
|
2318 |
|
|
When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
|
2319 |
|
|
search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
|
2320 |
|
|
@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
|
2321 |
|
|
between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
|
2322 |
|
|
uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
|
2323 |
|
|
@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
|
2324 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2325 |
|
|
|
2326 |
|
|
@kindex --enable-auto-import
|
2327 |
|
|
@item --enable-auto-import
|
2328 |
|
|
Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
|
2329 |
|
|
DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
|
2330 |
|
|
building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
|
2331 |
|
|
'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
|
2332 |
|
|
to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
|
2333 |
|
|
specification published by Microsoft.
|
2334 |
|
|
|
2335 |
|
|
Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
|
2336 |
|
|
data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
|
2337 |
|
|
placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
|
2338 |
|
|
around a problem with consts that is described here:
|
2339 |
|
|
http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
|
2340 |
|
|
|
2341 |
|
|
Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
|
2342 |
|
|
see this message:
|
2343 |
|
|
|
2344 |
|
|
"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
|
2345 |
|
|
documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
|
2346 |
|
|
|
2347 |
|
|
This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
|
2348 |
|
|
ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
|
2349 |
|
|
allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
|
2350 |
|
|
fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
|
2351 |
|
|
constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
|
2352 |
|
|
multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
|
2353 |
|
|
this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
|
2354 |
|
|
of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
|
2355 |
|
|
the warning, and exit.
|
2356 |
|
|
|
2357 |
|
|
There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
|
2358 |
|
|
data type of the exported variable:
|
2359 |
|
|
|
2360 |
|
|
One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
|
2361 |
|
|
of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
|
2362 |
|
|
this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
|
2363 |
|
|
|
2364 |
|
|
A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
|
2365 |
|
|
that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
|
2366 |
|
|
there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
|
2367 |
|
|
a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
|
2368 |
|
|
|
2369 |
|
|
@example
|
2370 |
|
|
extern type extern_array[];
|
2371 |
|
|
extern_array[1] -->
|
2372 |
|
|
@{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
|
2373 |
|
|
@end example
|
2374 |
|
|
|
2375 |
|
|
or
|
2376 |
|
|
|
2377 |
|
|
@example
|
2378 |
|
|
extern type extern_array[];
|
2379 |
|
|
extern_array[1] -->
|
2380 |
|
|
@{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
|
2381 |
|
|
@end example
|
2382 |
|
|
|
2383 |
|
|
For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
|
2384 |
|
|
is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
|
2385 |
|
|
|
2386 |
|
|
@example
|
2387 |
|
|
extern struct s extern_struct;
|
2388 |
|
|
extern_struct.field -->
|
2389 |
|
|
@{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
|
2390 |
|
|
@end example
|
2391 |
|
|
|
2392 |
|
|
or
|
2393 |
|
|
|
2394 |
|
|
@example
|
2395 |
|
|
extern long long extern_ll;
|
2396 |
|
|
extern_ll -->
|
2397 |
|
|
@{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
|
2398 |
|
|
@end example
|
2399 |
|
|
|
2400 |
|
|
A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
|
2401 |
|
|
'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
|
2402 |
|
|
@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
|
2403 |
|
|
requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
|
2404 |
|
|
building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
|
2405 |
|
|
merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
|
2406 |
|
|
between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
|
2407 |
|
|
constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
|
2408 |
|
|
|
2409 |
|
|
Original:
|
2410 |
|
|
@example
|
2411 |
|
|
--foo.h
|
2412 |
|
|
extern int arr[];
|
2413 |
|
|
--foo.c
|
2414 |
|
|
#include "foo.h"
|
2415 |
|
|
void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
|
2416 |
|
|
printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
|
2417 |
|
|
@}
|
2418 |
|
|
@end example
|
2419 |
|
|
|
2420 |
|
|
Solution 1:
|
2421 |
|
|
@example
|
2422 |
|
|
--foo.h
|
2423 |
|
|
extern int arr[];
|
2424 |
|
|
--foo.c
|
2425 |
|
|
#include "foo.h"
|
2426 |
|
|
void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
|
2427 |
|
|
/* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
|
2428 |
|
|
volatile int *parr = arr;
|
2429 |
|
|
printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
|
2430 |
|
|
@}
|
2431 |
|
|
@end example
|
2432 |
|
|
|
2433 |
|
|
Solution 2:
|
2434 |
|
|
@example
|
2435 |
|
|
--foo.h
|
2436 |
|
|
/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
|
2437 |
|
|
#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
|
2438 |
|
|
!(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
|
2439 |
|
|
#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
|
2440 |
|
|
#else
|
2441 |
|
|
#define FOO_IMPORT
|
2442 |
|
|
#endif
|
2443 |
|
|
extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
|
2444 |
|
|
--foo.c
|
2445 |
|
|
#include "foo.h"
|
2446 |
|
|
void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
|
2447 |
|
|
printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
|
2448 |
|
|
@}
|
2449 |
|
|
@end example
|
2450 |
|
|
|
2451 |
|
|
A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
|
2452 |
|
|
library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
|
2453 |
|
|
for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
|
2454 |
|
|
functions).
|
2455 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2456 |
|
|
|
2457 |
|
|
@kindex --disable-auto-import
|
2458 |
|
|
@item --disable-auto-import
|
2459 |
|
|
Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
|
2460 |
|
|
@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
|
2461 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2462 |
|
|
|
2463 |
|
|
@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
|
2464 |
|
|
@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
|
2465 |
|
|
If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
|
2466 |
|
|
that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
|
2467 |
|
|
a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
|
2468 |
|
|
environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
|
2469 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2470 |
|
|
|
2471 |
|
|
@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
|
2472 |
|
|
@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
|
2473 |
|
|
Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
|
2474 |
|
|
DLLs. This is the default.
|
2475 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2476 |
|
|
|
2477 |
|
|
@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
|
2478 |
|
|
@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
|
2479 |
|
|
Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
|
2480 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2481 |
|
|
|
2482 |
|
|
@kindex --section-alignment
|
2483 |
|
|
@item --section-alignment
|
2484 |
|
|
Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
|
2485 |
|
|
addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
|
2486 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2487 |
|
|
|
2488 |
|
|
@cindex stack size
|
2489 |
|
|
@kindex --stack
|
2490 |
|
|
@item --stack @var{reserve}
|
2491 |
|
|
@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
|
2492 |
|
|
Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
|
2493 |
|
|
to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
|
2494 |
|
|
committed.
|
2495 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2496 |
|
|
|
2497 |
|
|
@kindex --subsystem
|
2498 |
|
|
@item --subsystem @var{which}
|
2499 |
|
|
@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
|
2500 |
|
|
@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
|
2501 |
|
|
Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
|
2502 |
|
|
legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
|
2503 |
|
|
@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
|
2504 |
|
|
the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
|
2505 |
|
|
@var{which}.
|
2506 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
2507 |
|
|
|
2508 |
|
|
The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
|
2509 |
|
|
of the PE file header:
|
2510 |
|
|
[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
|
2511 |
|
|
|
2512 |
|
|
@kindex --dynamicbase
|
2513 |
|
|
@item --dynamicbase
|
2514 |
|
|
The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
|
2515 |
|
|
randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
|
2516 |
|
|
Vista for i386 PE targets.
|
2517 |
|
|
|
2518 |
|
|
@kindex --forceinteg
|
2519 |
|
|
@item --forceinteg
|
2520 |
|
|
Code integrity checks are enforced.
|
2521 |
|
|
|
2522 |
|
|
@kindex --nxcompat
|
2523 |
|
|
@item --nxcompat
|
2524 |
|
|
The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
|
2525 |
|
|
This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
|
2526 |
|
|
|
2527 |
|
|
@kindex --no-isolation
|
2528 |
|
|
@item --no-isolation
|
2529 |
|
|
Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
|
2530 |
|
|
|
2531 |
|
|
@kindex --no-seh
|
2532 |
|
|
@item --no-seh
|
2533 |
|
|
The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
|
2534 |
|
|
this image.
|
2535 |
|
|
|
2536 |
|
|
@kindex --no-bind
|
2537 |
|
|
@item --no-bind
|
2538 |
|
|
Do not bind this image.
|
2539 |
|
|
|
2540 |
|
|
@kindex --wdmdriver
|
2541 |
|
|
@item --wdmdriver
|
2542 |
|
|
The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
|
2543 |
|
|
|
2544 |
|
|
@kindex --tsaware
|
2545 |
|
|
@item --tsaware
|
2546 |
|
|
The image is Terminal Server aware.
|
2547 |
|
|
|
2548 |
|
|
@end table
|
2549 |
|
|
|
2550 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2551 |
|
|
|
2552 |
|
|
@ifset M68HC11
|
2553 |
|
|
@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
|
2554 |
|
|
|
2555 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS
|
2556 |
|
|
|
2557 |
|
|
The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
|
2558 |
|
|
memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
|
2559 |
|
|
|
2560 |
|
|
@table @gcctabopt
|
2561 |
|
|
|
2562 |
|
|
@kindex --no-trampoline
|
2563 |
|
|
@item --no-trampoline
|
2564 |
|
|
This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
|
2565 |
|
|
is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
|
2566 |
|
|
instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
|
2567 |
|
|
|
2568 |
|
|
@kindex --bank-window
|
2569 |
|
|
@item --bank-window @var{name}
|
2570 |
|
|
This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
|
2571 |
|
|
the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
|
2572 |
|
|
The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
|
2573 |
|
|
paging and addresses within the memory window.
|
2574 |
|
|
|
2575 |
|
|
@end table
|
2576 |
|
|
|
2577 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2578 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
2579 |
|
|
|
2580 |
|
|
@ifset M68K
|
2581 |
|
|
@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
|
2582 |
|
|
|
2583 |
|
|
@c man begin OPTIONS
|
2584 |
|
|
|
2585 |
|
|
The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
|
2586 |
|
|
when linking for 68K targets.
|
2587 |
|
|
|
2588 |
|
|
@table @gcctabopt
|
2589 |
|
|
|
2590 |
|
|
@kindex --got
|
2591 |
|
|
@item --got=@var{type}
|
2592 |
|
|
This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
|
2593 |
|
|
@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
|
2594 |
|
|
@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
|
2595 |
|
|
Info entry for @file{ld}.
|
2596 |
|
|
|
2597 |
|
|
@end table
|
2598 |
|
|
|
2599 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2600 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
2601 |
|
|
|
2602 |
|
|
@ifset UsesEnvVars
|
2603 |
|
|
@node Environment
|
2604 |
|
|
@section Environment Variables
|
2605 |
|
|
|
2606 |
|
|
@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
|
2607 |
|
|
|
2608 |
|
|
You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
|
2609 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
2610 |
|
|
@code{GNUTARGET},
|
2611 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
2612 |
|
|
@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
|
2613 |
|
|
|
2614 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
2615 |
|
|
@kindex GNUTARGET
|
2616 |
|
|
@cindex default input format
|
2617 |
|
|
@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
|
2618 |
|
|
use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
|
2619 |
|
|
of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
|
2620 |
|
|
@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
|
2621 |
|
|
of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
|
2622 |
|
|
attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
|
2623 |
|
|
this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
|
2624 |
|
|
there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
|
2625 |
|
|
object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
|
2626 |
|
|
BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
|
2627 |
|
|
in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
|
2628 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
2629 |
|
|
|
2630 |
|
|
@kindex LDEMULATION
|
2631 |
|
|
@cindex default emulation
|
2632 |
|
|
@cindex emulation, default
|
2633 |
|
|
@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
|
2634 |
|
|
@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
|
2635 |
|
|
behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
|
2636 |
|
|
available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
|
2637 |
|
|
the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
|
2638 |
|
|
variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
|
2639 |
|
|
linker was configured.
|
2640 |
|
|
|
2641 |
|
|
@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
|
2642 |
|
|
@cindex demangling, default
|
2643 |
|
|
Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
|
2644 |
|
|
@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
|
2645 |
|
|
default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
|
2646 |
|
|
a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
|
2647 |
|
|
may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
|
2648 |
|
|
options.
|
2649 |
|
|
|
2650 |
|
|
@c man end
|
2651 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
2652 |
|
|
|
2653 |
|
|
@node Scripts
|
2654 |
|
|
@chapter Linker Scripts
|
2655 |
|
|
|
2656 |
|
|
@cindex scripts
|
2657 |
|
|
@cindex linker scripts
|
2658 |
|
|
@cindex command files
|
2659 |
|
|
Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
|
2660 |
|
|
written in the linker command language.
|
2661 |
|
|
|
2662 |
|
|
The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
|
2663 |
|
|
the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
|
2664 |
|
|
the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
|
2665 |
|
|
more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
|
2666 |
|
|
direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
|
2667 |
|
|
described below.
|
2668 |
|
|
|
2669 |
|
|
The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
|
2670 |
|
|
yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
|
2671 |
|
|
linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
|
2672 |
|
|
to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
|
2673 |
|
|
such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
|
2674 |
|
|
|
2675 |
|
|
You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
|
2676 |
|
|
line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
|
2677 |
|
|
default linker script.
|
2678 |
|
|
|
2679 |
|
|
You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
|
2680 |
|
|
to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
|
2681 |
|
|
Linker Scripts}.
|
2682 |
|
|
|
2683 |
|
|
@menu
|
2684 |
|
|
* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
|
2685 |
|
|
* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
|
2686 |
|
|
* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
|
2687 |
|
|
* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
|
2688 |
|
|
* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
|
2689 |
|
|
* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
|
2690 |
|
|
* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
|
2691 |
|
|
* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
|
2692 |
|
|
* VERSION:: VERSION Command
|
2693 |
|
|
* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
|
2694 |
|
|
* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
|
2695 |
|
|
@end menu
|
2696 |
|
|
|
2697 |
|
|
@node Basic Script Concepts
|
2698 |
|
|
@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
|
2699 |
|
|
@cindex linker script concepts
|
2700 |
|
|
We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
|
2701 |
|
|
describe the linker script language.
|
2702 |
|
|
|
2703 |
|
|
The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
|
2704 |
|
|
file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
|
2705 |
|
|
@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
|
2706 |
|
|
The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
|
2707 |
|
|
purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
|
2708 |
|
|
among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
|
2709 |
|
|
section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
|
2710 |
|
|
in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
|
2711 |
|
|
|
2712 |
|
|
Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
|
2713 |
|
|
also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
|
2714 |
|
|
contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
|
2715 |
|
|
the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
|
2716 |
|
|
A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
|
2717 |
|
|
area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
|
2718 |
|
|
loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
|
2719 |
|
|
which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
|
2720 |
|
|
of debugging information.
|
2721 |
|
|
|
2722 |
|
|
Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
|
2723 |
|
|
first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
|
2724 |
|
|
the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
|
2725 |
|
|
@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
|
2726 |
|
|
section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
|
2727 |
|
|
same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
|
2728 |
|
|
is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
|
2729 |
|
|
(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
|
2730 |
|
|
based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
|
2731 |
|
|
RAM address would be the VMA.
|
2732 |
|
|
|
2733 |
|
|
You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
|
2734 |
|
|
program with the @samp{-h} option.
|
2735 |
|
|
|
2736 |
|
|
Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
|
2737 |
|
|
@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
|
2738 |
|
|
has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
|
2739 |
|
|
information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
|
2740 |
|
|
will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
|
2741 |
|
|
static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
|
2742 |
|
|
referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
|
2743 |
|
|
|
2744 |
|
|
You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
|
2745 |
|
|
program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
|
2746 |
|
|
option.
|
2747 |
|
|
|
2748 |
|
|
@node Script Format
|
2749 |
|
|
@section Linker Script Format
|
2750 |
|
|
@cindex linker script format
|
2751 |
|
|
Linker scripts are text files.
|
2752 |
|
|
|
2753 |
|
|
You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
|
2754 |
|
|
either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
|
2755 |
|
|
symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
|
2756 |
|
|
generally ignored.
|
2757 |
|
|
|
2758 |
|
|
Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
|
2759 |
|
|
If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
|
2760 |
|
|
otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
|
2761 |
|
|
double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
|
2762 |
|
|
file name.
|
2763 |
|
|
|
2764 |
|
|
You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
|
2765 |
|
|
@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
|
2766 |
|
|
to whitespace.
|
2767 |
|
|
|
2768 |
|
|
@node Simple Example
|
2769 |
|
|
@section Simple Linker Script Example
|
2770 |
|
|
@cindex linker script example
|
2771 |
|
|
@cindex example of linker script
|
2772 |
|
|
Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
|
2773 |
|
|
|
2774 |
|
|
The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
|
2775 |
|
|
@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
|
2776 |
|
|
memory layout of the output file.
|
2777 |
|
|
|
2778 |
|
|
The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
|
2779 |
|
|
describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
|
2780 |
|
|
code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
|
2781 |
|
|
@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
|
2782 |
|
|
Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
|
2783 |
|
|
your input files.
|
2784 |
|
|
|
2785 |
|
|
For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
|
2786 |
|
|
0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
|
2787 |
|
|
linker script which will do that:
|
2788 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2789 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
2790 |
|
|
@{
|
2791 |
|
|
. = 0x10000;
|
2792 |
|
|
.text : @{ *(.text) @}
|
2793 |
|
|
. = 0x8000000;
|
2794 |
|
|
.data : @{ *(.data) @}
|
2795 |
|
|
.bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
|
2796 |
|
|
@}
|
2797 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2798 |
|
|
|
2799 |
|
|
You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
|
2800 |
|
|
followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
|
2801 |
|
|
descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
|
2802 |
|
|
|
2803 |
|
|
The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
|
2804 |
|
|
sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
|
2805 |
|
|
counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
|
2806 |
|
|
other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
|
2807 |
|
|
current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
|
2808 |
|
|
incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
|
2809 |
|
|
@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
|
2810 |
|
|
|
2811 |
|
|
The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
|
2812 |
|
|
required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
|
2813 |
|
|
after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
|
2814 |
|
|
which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
|
2815 |
|
|
wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
|
2816 |
|
|
means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
|
2817 |
|
|
|
2818 |
|
|
Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
|
2819 |
|
|
@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
|
2820 |
|
|
@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
|
2821 |
|
|
|
2822 |
|
|
The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
|
2823 |
|
|
the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
|
2824 |
|
|
at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
|
2825 |
|
|
output section, the value of the location counter will be
|
2826 |
|
|
@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
|
2827 |
|
|
effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
|
2828 |
|
|
immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
|
2829 |
|
|
|
2830 |
|
|
The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
|
2831 |
|
|
alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
|
2832 |
|
|
example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
|
2833 |
|
|
sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
|
2834 |
|
|
may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
|
2835 |
|
|
sections.
|
2836 |
|
|
|
2837 |
|
|
That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
|
2838 |
|
|
|
2839 |
|
|
@node Simple Commands
|
2840 |
|
|
@section Simple Linker Script Commands
|
2841 |
|
|
@cindex linker script simple commands
|
2842 |
|
|
In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
|
2843 |
|
|
|
2844 |
|
|
@menu
|
2845 |
|
|
* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
|
2846 |
|
|
* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
|
2847 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
2848 |
|
|
* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
|
2849 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
2850 |
|
|
|
2851 |
|
|
* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
|
2852 |
|
|
* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
|
2853 |
|
|
@end menu
|
2854 |
|
|
|
2855 |
|
|
@node Entry Point
|
2856 |
|
|
@subsection Setting the Entry Point
|
2857 |
|
|
@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
|
2858 |
|
|
@cindex start of execution
|
2859 |
|
|
@cindex first instruction
|
2860 |
|
|
@cindex entry point
|
2861 |
|
|
The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
|
2862 |
|
|
point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
|
2863 |
|
|
entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
|
2864 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
2865 |
|
|
ENTRY(@var{symbol})
|
2866 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
2867 |
|
|
|
2868 |
|
|
There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
|
2869 |
|
|
entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
|
2870 |
|
|
stopping when one of them succeeds:
|
2871 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
2872 |
|
|
@item
|
2873 |
|
|
the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
|
2874 |
|
|
@item
|
2875 |
|
|
the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
|
2876 |
|
|
@item
|
2877 |
|
|
the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
|
2878 |
|
|
@item
|
2879 |
|
|
the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
|
2880 |
|
|
@item
|
2881 |
|
|
The address @code{0}.
|
2882 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
2883 |
|
|
|
2884 |
|
|
@node File Commands
|
2885 |
|
|
@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
|
2886 |
|
|
@cindex linker script file commands
|
2887 |
|
|
Several linker script commands deal with files.
|
2888 |
|
|
|
2889 |
|
|
@table @code
|
2890 |
|
|
@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
|
2891 |
|
|
@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
|
2892 |
|
|
@cindex including a linker script
|
2893 |
|
|
Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
|
2894 |
|
|
be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
|
2895 |
|
|
with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
|
2896 |
|
|
10 levels deep.
|
2897 |
|
|
|
2898 |
|
|
You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
|
2899 |
|
|
@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
|
2900 |
|
|
|
2901 |
|
|
@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
|
2902 |
|
|
@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
|
2903 |
|
|
@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
|
2904 |
|
|
@cindex input files in linker scripts
|
2905 |
|
|
@cindex input object files in linker scripts
|
2906 |
|
|
@cindex linker script input object files
|
2907 |
|
|
The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
|
2908 |
|
|
in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
|
2909 |
|
|
|
2910 |
|
|
For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
|
2911 |
|
|
a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
|
2912 |
|
|
then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
|
2913 |
|
|
|
2914 |
|
|
In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
|
2915 |
|
|
script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
|
2916 |
|
|
|
2917 |
|
|
In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
|
2918 |
|
|
with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
|
2919 |
|
|
located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
|
2920 |
|
|
for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
|
2921 |
|
|
open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
|
2922 |
|
|
linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
|
2923 |
|
|
description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
|
2924 |
|
|
|
2925 |
|
|
If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
|
2926 |
|
|
name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
|
2927 |
|
|
@samp{-l}.
|
2928 |
|
|
|
2929 |
|
|
When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
|
2930 |
|
|
files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
|
2931 |
|
|
script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
|
2932 |
|
|
|
2933 |
|
|
@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
|
2934 |
|
|
@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
|
2935 |
|
|
@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
|
2936 |
|
|
@cindex grouping input files
|
2937 |
|
|
The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
|
2938 |
|
|
files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
|
2939 |
|
|
new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
|
2940 |
|
|
in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
|
2941 |
|
|
|
2942 |
|
|
@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
|
2943 |
|
|
@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
|
2944 |
|
|
@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
|
2945 |
|
|
This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
|
2946 |
|
|
commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
|
2947 |
|
|
as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
|
2948 |
|
|
with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
|
2949 |
|
|
when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
|
2950 |
|
|
@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
|
2951 |
|
|
and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
|
2952 |
|
|
setting afterwards.
|
2953 |
|
|
|
2954 |
|
|
@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
|
2955 |
|
|
@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
|
2956 |
|
|
@cindex output file name in linker script
|
2957 |
|
|
The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
|
2958 |
|
|
@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
|
2959 |
|
|
@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
|
2960 |
|
|
Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
|
2961 |
|
|
precedence.
|
2962 |
|
|
|
2963 |
|
|
You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
|
2964 |
|
|
output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
|
2965 |
|
|
|
2966 |
|
|
@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
|
2967 |
|
|
@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
|
2968 |
|
|
@cindex library search path in linker script
|
2969 |
|
|
@cindex archive search path in linker script
|
2970 |
|
|
@cindex search path in linker script
|
2971 |
|
|
The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
|
2972 |
|
|
@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
|
2973 |
|
|
@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
|
2974 |
|
|
on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
|
2975 |
|
|
are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
|
2976 |
|
|
the command line option are searched first.
|
2977 |
|
|
|
2978 |
|
|
@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
|
2979 |
|
|
@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
|
2980 |
|
|
@cindex first input file
|
2981 |
|
|
The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
|
2982 |
|
|
that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
|
2983 |
|
|
though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
|
2984 |
|
|
when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
|
2985 |
|
|
first file.
|
2986 |
|
|
@end table
|
2987 |
|
|
|
2988 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
2989 |
|
|
@node Format Commands
|
2990 |
|
|
@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
|
2991 |
|
|
A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
|
2992 |
|
|
|
2993 |
|
|
@table @code
|
2994 |
|
|
@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
|
2995 |
|
|
@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
|
2996 |
|
|
@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
|
2997 |
|
|
@cindex output file format in linker script
|
2998 |
|
|
The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
|
2999 |
|
|
output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
|
3000 |
|
|
exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
|
3001 |
|
|
(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
|
3002 |
|
|
line option takes precedence.
|
3003 |
|
|
|
3004 |
|
|
You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
|
3005 |
|
|
formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
|
3006 |
|
|
This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
|
3007 |
|
|
desired endianness.
|
3008 |
|
|
|
3009 |
|
|
If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
|
3010 |
|
|
will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
|
3011 |
|
|
output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
|
3012 |
|
|
used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
|
3013 |
|
|
|
3014 |
|
|
For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
|
3015 |
|
|
command:
|
3016 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3017 |
|
|
OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
|
3018 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3019 |
|
|
This says that the default format for the output file is
|
3020 |
|
|
@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
|
3021 |
|
|
option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
|
3022 |
|
|
format.
|
3023 |
|
|
|
3024 |
|
|
@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
|
3025 |
|
|
@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
|
3026 |
|
|
@cindex input file format in linker script
|
3027 |
|
|
The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
|
3028 |
|
|
files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
|
3029 |
|
|
This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
|
3030 |
|
|
(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
|
3031 |
|
|
is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
|
3032 |
|
|
command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
|
3033 |
|
|
@end table
|
3034 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
3035 |
|
|
|
3036 |
|
|
@node REGION_ALIAS
|
3037 |
|
|
@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
|
3038 |
|
|
@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
|
3039 |
|
|
@cindex region alias
|
3040 |
|
|
@cindex region names
|
3041 |
|
|
|
3042 |
|
|
Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
|
3043 |
|
|
@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
|
3044 |
|
|
|
3045 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3046 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
|
3047 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3048 |
|
|
|
3049 |
|
|
The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
|
3050 |
|
|
memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
|
3051 |
|
|
to memory regions. An example follows.
|
3052 |
|
|
|
3053 |
|
|
Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
|
3054 |
|
|
memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
|
3055 |
|
|
that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
|
3056 |
|
|
non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
|
3057 |
|
|
access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
|
3058 |
|
|
read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
|
3059 |
|
|
sections:
|
3060 |
|
|
|
3061 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
3062 |
|
|
@item
|
3063 |
|
|
@code{.text} program code;
|
3064 |
|
|
@item
|
3065 |
|
|
@code{.rodata} read-only data;
|
3066 |
|
|
@item
|
3067 |
|
|
@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
|
3068 |
|
|
@item
|
3069 |
|
|
@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
|
3070 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
3071 |
|
|
|
3072 |
|
|
The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
|
3073 |
|
|
part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
|
3074 |
|
|
output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
|
3075 |
|
|
systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
|
3076 |
|
|
@code{C}:
|
3077 |
|
|
@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
|
3078 |
|
|
@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
|
3079 |
|
|
@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
|
3080 |
|
|
@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
|
3081 |
|
|
@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
|
3082 |
|
|
@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
|
3083 |
|
|
@end multitable
|
3084 |
|
|
The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
|
3085 |
|
|
loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
|
3086 |
|
|
the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
|
3087 |
|
|
the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
|
3088 |
|
|
|
3089 |
|
|
The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
|
3090 |
|
|
includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
|
3091 |
|
|
memory layout:
|
3092 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3093 |
|
|
INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
|
3094 |
|
|
|
3095 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
3096 |
|
|
@{
|
3097 |
|
|
.text :
|
3098 |
|
|
@{
|
3099 |
|
|
*(.text)
|
3100 |
|
|
@} > REGION_TEXT
|
3101 |
|
|
.rodata :
|
3102 |
|
|
@{
|
3103 |
|
|
*(.rodata)
|
3104 |
|
|
rodata_end = .;
|
3105 |
|
|
@} > REGION_RODATA
|
3106 |
|
|
.data : AT (rodata_end)
|
3107 |
|
|
@{
|
3108 |
|
|
data_start = .;
|
3109 |
|
|
*(.data)
|
3110 |
|
|
@} > REGION_DATA
|
3111 |
|
|
data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
|
3112 |
|
|
data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
|
3113 |
|
|
.bss :
|
3114 |
|
|
@{
|
3115 |
|
|
*(.bss)
|
3116 |
|
|
@} > REGION_BSS
|
3117 |
|
|
@}
|
3118 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3119 |
|
|
|
3120 |
|
|
Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
|
3121 |
|
|
regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
|
3122 |
|
|
variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
|
3123 |
|
|
@table @code
|
3124 |
|
|
@item A
|
3125 |
|
|
Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
|
3126 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3127 |
|
|
MEMORY
|
3128 |
|
|
@{
|
3129 |
|
|
RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
|
3130 |
|
|
@}
|
3131 |
|
|
|
3132 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
|
3133 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
|
3134 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
3135 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
3136 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3137 |
|
|
@item B
|
3138 |
|
|
Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
|
3139 |
|
|
into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
|
3140 |
|
|
@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
|
3141 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3142 |
|
|
MEMORY
|
3143 |
|
|
@{
|
3144 |
|
|
ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
|
3145 |
|
|
RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
3146 |
|
|
@}
|
3147 |
|
|
|
3148 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
|
3149 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
|
3150 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
3151 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
3152 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3153 |
|
|
@item C
|
3154 |
|
|
Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
|
3155 |
|
|
@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
|
3156 |
|
|
initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
|
3157 |
|
|
system start into the @code{RAM}.
|
3158 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3159 |
|
|
MEMORY
|
3160 |
|
|
@{
|
3161 |
|
|
ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
|
3162 |
|
|
ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
3163 |
|
|
RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
3164 |
|
|
@}
|
3165 |
|
|
|
3166 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
|
3167 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
|
3168 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
3169 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
3170 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3171 |
|
|
@end table
|
3172 |
|
|
|
3173 |
|
|
It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
|
3174 |
|
|
@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
|
3175 |
|
|
necessary:
|
3176 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3177 |
|
|
#include <string.h>
|
3178 |
|
|
|
3179 |
|
|
extern char data_start [];
|
3180 |
|
|
extern char data_size [];
|
3181 |
|
|
extern char data_load_start [];
|
3182 |
|
|
|
3183 |
|
|
void copy_data(void)
|
3184 |
|
|
@{
|
3185 |
|
|
if (data_start != data_load_start)
|
3186 |
|
|
@{
|
3187 |
|
|
memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
|
3188 |
|
|
@}
|
3189 |
|
|
@}
|
3190 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3191 |
|
|
|
3192 |
|
|
@node Miscellaneous Commands
|
3193 |
|
|
@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
|
3194 |
|
|
There are a few other linker scripts commands.
|
3195 |
|
|
|
3196 |
|
|
@table @code
|
3197 |
|
|
@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
|
3198 |
|
|
@kindex ASSERT
|
3199 |
|
|
@cindex assertion in linker script
|
3200 |
|
|
Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
|
3201 |
|
|
with an error code, and print @var{message}.
|
3202 |
|
|
|
3203 |
|
|
@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
|
3204 |
|
|
@kindex EXTERN
|
3205 |
|
|
@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
|
3206 |
|
|
Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
|
3207 |
|
|
symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
|
3208 |
|
|
modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
|
3209 |
|
|
each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
|
3210 |
|
|
command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
|
3211 |
|
|
|
3212 |
|
|
@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
|
3213 |
|
|
@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
|
3214 |
|
|
@cindex common allocation in linker script
|
3215 |
|
|
This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
|
3216 |
|
|
to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
|
3217 |
|
|
output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
|
3218 |
|
|
|
3219 |
|
|
@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
|
3220 |
|
|
@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
|
3221 |
|
|
@cindex common allocation in linker script
|
3222 |
|
|
This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
|
3223 |
|
|
command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
|
3224 |
|
|
to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
|
3225 |
|
|
|
3226 |
|
|
@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
|
3227 |
|
|
@kindex INSERT
|
3228 |
|
|
@cindex insert user script into default script
|
3229 |
|
|
This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
|
3230 |
|
|
augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
|
3231 |
|
|
inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
|
3232 |
|
|
@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
|
3233 |
|
|
default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
|
3234 |
|
|
sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
|
3235 |
|
|
linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
|
3236 |
|
|
insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
|
3237 |
|
|
linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
|
3238 |
|
|
default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
|
3239 |
|
|
of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
|
3240 |
|
|
to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
|
3241 |
|
|
is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
|
3242 |
|
|
|
3243 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3244 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
3245 |
|
|
@{
|
3246 |
|
|
OVERLAY :
|
3247 |
|
|
@{
|
3248 |
|
|
.ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
|
3249 |
|
|
.ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
|
3250 |
|
|
@}
|
3251 |
|
|
@}
|
3252 |
|
|
INSERT AFTER .text;
|
3253 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3254 |
|
|
|
3255 |
|
|
@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
|
3256 |
|
|
@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
|
3257 |
|
|
@cindex cross references
|
3258 |
|
|
This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
|
3259 |
|
|
references among certain output sections.
|
3260 |
|
|
|
3261 |
|
|
In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
|
3262 |
|
|
using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
|
3263 |
|
|
will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
|
3264 |
|
|
errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
|
3265 |
|
|
a function defined in the other section.
|
3266 |
|
|
|
3267 |
|
|
The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
|
3268 |
|
|
@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
|
3269 |
|
|
an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
|
3270 |
|
|
@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
|
3271 |
|
|
names.
|
3272 |
|
|
|
3273 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
3274 |
|
|
@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
|
3275 |
|
|
@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
|
3276 |
|
|
@cindex machine architecture
|
3277 |
|
|
@cindex architecture
|
3278 |
|
|
Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
|
3279 |
|
|
of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
|
3280 |
|
|
architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
|
3281 |
|
|
the @samp{-f} option.
|
3282 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
3283 |
|
|
@end table
|
3284 |
|
|
|
3285 |
|
|
@node Assignments
|
3286 |
|
|
@section Assigning Values to Symbols
|
3287 |
|
|
@cindex assignment in scripts
|
3288 |
|
|
@cindex symbol definition, scripts
|
3289 |
|
|
@cindex variables, defining
|
3290 |
|
|
You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
|
3291 |
|
|
the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
|
3292 |
|
|
|
3293 |
|
|
@menu
|
3294 |
|
|
* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
|
3295 |
|
|
* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
|
3296 |
|
|
* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
|
3297 |
|
|
* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
|
3298 |
|
|
@end menu
|
3299 |
|
|
|
3300 |
|
|
@node Simple Assignments
|
3301 |
|
|
@subsection Simple Assignments
|
3302 |
|
|
|
3303 |
|
|
You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
|
3304 |
|
|
|
3305 |
|
|
@table @code
|
3306 |
|
|
@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
|
3307 |
|
|
@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
|
3308 |
|
|
@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
|
3309 |
|
|
@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
|
3310 |
|
|
@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
|
3311 |
|
|
@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
|
3312 |
|
|
@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
|
3313 |
|
|
@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
|
3314 |
|
|
@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
|
3315 |
|
|
@end table
|
3316 |
|
|
|
3317 |
|
|
The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
|
3318 |
|
|
@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
|
3319 |
|
|
defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
|
3320 |
|
|
|
3321 |
|
|
The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
|
3322 |
|
|
may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
|
3323 |
|
|
|
3324 |
|
|
The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
|
3325 |
|
|
|
3326 |
|
|
Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
|
3327 |
|
|
|
3328 |
|
|
You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
|
3329 |
|
|
statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
|
3330 |
|
|
section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
|
3331 |
|
|
|
3332 |
|
|
The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
|
3333 |
|
|
expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
|
3334 |
|
|
|
3335 |
|
|
Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
|
3336 |
|
|
assignments may be used:
|
3337 |
|
|
|
3338 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3339 |
|
|
floating_point = 0;
|
3340 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
3341 |
|
|
@{
|
3342 |
|
|
.text :
|
3343 |
|
|
@{
|
3344 |
|
|
*(.text)
|
3345 |
|
|
_etext = .;
|
3346 |
|
|
@}
|
3347 |
|
|
_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
|
3348 |
|
|
.data : @{ *(.data) @}
|
3349 |
|
|
@}
|
3350 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3351 |
|
|
@noindent
|
3352 |
|
|
In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
|
3353 |
|
|
zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
|
3354 |
|
|
the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
|
3355 |
|
|
defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
|
3356 |
|
|
upward to a 4 byte boundary.
|
3357 |
|
|
|
3358 |
|
|
@node PROVIDE
|
3359 |
|
|
@subsection PROVIDE
|
3360 |
|
|
@cindex PROVIDE
|
3361 |
|
|
In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
|
3362 |
|
|
only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
|
3363 |
|
|
the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
|
3364 |
|
|
@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
|
3365 |
|
|
@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
|
3366 |
|
|
@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
|
3367 |
|
|
@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
|
3368 |
|
|
@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
|
3369 |
|
|
|
3370 |
|
|
Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
|
3371 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3372 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
3373 |
|
|
@{
|
3374 |
|
|
.text :
|
3375 |
|
|
@{
|
3376 |
|
|
*(.text)
|
3377 |
|
|
_etext = .;
|
3378 |
|
|
PROVIDE(etext = .);
|
3379 |
|
|
@}
|
3380 |
|
|
@}
|
3381 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3382 |
|
|
|
3383 |
|
|
In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
|
3384 |
|
|
underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
|
3385 |
|
|
the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
|
3386 |
|
|
underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
|
3387 |
|
|
If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
|
3388 |
|
|
linker will use the definition in the linker script.
|
3389 |
|
|
|
3390 |
|
|
@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
|
3391 |
|
|
@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
|
3392 |
|
|
@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
|
3393 |
|
|
Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
|
3394 |
|
|
hidden and won't be exported.
|
3395 |
|
|
|
3396 |
|
|
@node Source Code Reference
|
3397 |
|
|
@subsection Source Code Reference
|
3398 |
|
|
|
3399 |
|
|
Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
|
3400 |
|
|
intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
|
3401 |
|
|
a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
|
3402 |
|
|
symbol that does not have a value.
|
3403 |
|
|
|
3404 |
|
|
Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
|
3405 |
|
|
transform names in the source code into different names when they are
|
3406 |
|
|
stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
|
3407 |
|
|
prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
|
3408 |
|
|
mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
|
3409 |
|
|
of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
|
3410 |
|
|
variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
|
3411 |
|
|
linker script variable might be referred to as:
|
3412 |
|
|
|
3413 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3414 |
|
|
extern int foo;
|
3415 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3416 |
|
|
|
3417 |
|
|
But in the linker script it might be defined as:
|
3418 |
|
|
|
3419 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3420 |
|
|
_foo = 1000;
|
3421 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3422 |
|
|
|
3423 |
|
|
In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
|
3424 |
|
|
transformation has taken place.
|
3425 |
|
|
|
3426 |
|
|
When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
|
3427 |
|
|
things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
|
3428 |
|
|
in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
|
3429 |
|
|
second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
|
3430 |
|
|
table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
|
3431 |
|
|
contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
|
3432 |
|
|
value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
|
3433 |
|
|
|
3434 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3435 |
|
|
int foo = 1000;
|
3436 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3437 |
|
|
|
3438 |
|
|
creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
|
3439 |
|
|
holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
|
3440 |
|
|
number 1000 is initially stored.
|
3441 |
|
|
|
3442 |
|
|
When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
|
3443 |
|
|
first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
|
3444 |
|
|
memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
|
3445 |
|
|
So:
|
3446 |
|
|
|
3447 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3448 |
|
|
foo = 1;
|
3449 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3450 |
|
|
|
3451 |
|
|
looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
|
3452 |
|
|
associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
|
3453 |
|
|
address. Whereas:
|
3454 |
|
|
|
3455 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3456 |
|
|
int * a = & foo;
|
3457 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3458 |
|
|
|
3459 |
|
|
looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
|
3460 |
|
|
and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
|
3461 |
|
|
the variable @samp{a}.
|
3462 |
|
|
|
3463 |
|
|
Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
|
3464 |
|
|
the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
|
3465 |
|
|
an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
|
3466 |
|
|
|
3467 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3468 |
|
|
foo = 1000;
|
3469 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3470 |
|
|
|
3471 |
|
|
creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
|
3472 |
|
|
the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
|
3473 |
|
|
address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
|
3474 |
|
|
linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
|
3475 |
|
|
access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
|
3476 |
|
|
|
3477 |
|
|
Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
|
3478 |
|
|
you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
|
3479 |
|
|
use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
|
3480 |
|
|
section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
|
3481 |
|
|
linker script contains these declarations:
|
3482 |
|
|
|
3483 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3484 |
|
|
@group
|
3485 |
|
|
start_of_ROM = .ROM;
|
3486 |
|
|
end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
|
3487 |
|
|
start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
|
3488 |
|
|
@end group
|
3489 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3490 |
|
|
|
3491 |
|
|
Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
|
3492 |
|
|
|
3493 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3494 |
|
|
@group
|
3495 |
|
|
extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
|
3496 |
|
|
|
3497 |
|
|
memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
|
3498 |
|
|
@end group
|
3499 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3500 |
|
|
|
3501 |
|
|
Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
|
3502 |
|
|
|
3503 |
|
|
@node SECTIONS
|
3504 |
|
|
@section SECTIONS Command
|
3505 |
|
|
@kindex SECTIONS
|
3506 |
|
|
The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
|
3507 |
|
|
into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
|
3508 |
|
|
|
3509 |
|
|
The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
|
3510 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3511 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
3512 |
|
|
@{
|
3513 |
|
|
@var{sections-command}
|
3514 |
|
|
@var{sections-command}
|
3515 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
3516 |
|
|
@}
|
3517 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3518 |
|
|
|
3519 |
|
|
Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
|
3520 |
|
|
|
3521 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
3522 |
|
|
@item
|
3523 |
|
|
an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
|
3524 |
|
|
@item
|
3525 |
|
|
a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
|
3526 |
|
|
@item
|
3527 |
|
|
an output section description
|
3528 |
|
|
@item
|
3529 |
|
|
an overlay description
|
3530 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
3531 |
|
|
|
3532 |
|
|
The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
|
3533 |
|
|
@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
|
3534 |
|
|
those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
|
3535 |
|
|
understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
|
3536 |
|
|
the layout of the output file.
|
3537 |
|
|
|
3538 |
|
|
Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
|
3539 |
|
|
below.
|
3540 |
|
|
|
3541 |
|
|
If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
|
3542 |
|
|
linker will place each input section into an identically named output
|
3543 |
|
|
section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
|
3544 |
|
|
input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
|
3545 |
|
|
example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
|
3546 |
|
|
in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
|
3547 |
|
|
|
3548 |
|
|
@menu
|
3549 |
|
|
* Output Section Description:: Output section description
|
3550 |
|
|
* Output Section Name:: Output section name
|
3551 |
|
|
* Output Section Address:: Output section address
|
3552 |
|
|
* Input Section:: Input section description
|
3553 |
|
|
* Output Section Data:: Output section data
|
3554 |
|
|
* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
|
3555 |
|
|
* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
|
3556 |
|
|
* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
|
3557 |
|
|
* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
|
3558 |
|
|
@end menu
|
3559 |
|
|
|
3560 |
|
|
@node Output Section Description
|
3561 |
|
|
@subsection Output Section Description
|
3562 |
|
|
The full description of an output section looks like this:
|
3563 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3564 |
|
|
@group
|
3565 |
|
|
@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
|
3566 |
|
|
[AT(@var{lma})]
|
3567 |
|
|
[ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
|
3568 |
|
|
[SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
|
3569 |
|
|
[@var{constraint}]
|
3570 |
|
|
@{
|
3571 |
|
|
@var{output-section-command}
|
3572 |
|
|
@var{output-section-command}
|
3573 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
3574 |
|
|
@} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
|
3575 |
|
|
@end group
|
3576 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3577 |
|
|
|
3578 |
|
|
Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
|
3579 |
|
|
|
3580 |
|
|
The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
|
3581 |
|
|
name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
|
3582 |
|
|
The line breaks and other white space are optional.
|
3583 |
|
|
|
3584 |
|
|
Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
|
3585 |
|
|
|
3586 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
3587 |
|
|
@item
|
3588 |
|
|
a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
|
3589 |
|
|
@item
|
3590 |
|
|
an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
|
3591 |
|
|
@item
|
3592 |
|
|
data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
|
3593 |
|
|
@item
|
3594 |
|
|
a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
|
3595 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
3596 |
|
|
|
3597 |
|
|
@node Output Section Name
|
3598 |
|
|
@subsection Output Section Name
|
3599 |
|
|
@cindex name, section
|
3600 |
|
|
@cindex section name
|
3601 |
|
|
The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
|
3602 |
|
|
meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
|
3603 |
|
|
support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
|
3604 |
|
|
must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
|
3605 |
|
|
example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
|
3606 |
|
|
output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
|
3607 |
|
|
names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
|
3608 |
|
|
quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
|
3609 |
|
|
characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
|
3610 |
|
|
commas must be quoted.
|
3611 |
|
|
|
3612 |
|
|
The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
|
3613 |
|
|
Discarding}.
|
3614 |
|
|
|
3615 |
|
|
@node Output Section Address
|
3616 |
|
|
@subsection Output Section Address
|
3617 |
|
|
@cindex address, section
|
3618 |
|
|
@cindex section address
|
3619 |
|
|
The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
|
3620 |
|
|
address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
|
3621 |
|
|
the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
|
3622 |
|
|
based on the current value of the location counter.
|
3623 |
|
|
|
3624 |
|
|
If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
|
3625 |
|
|
set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
|
3626 |
|
|
@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
|
3627 |
|
|
current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
|
3628 |
|
|
requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
|
3629 |
|
|
output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
|
3630 |
|
|
within the output section.
|
3631 |
|
|
|
3632 |
|
|
For example,
|
3633 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3634 |
|
|
.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
|
3635 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3636 |
|
|
@noindent
|
3637 |
|
|
and
|
3638 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3639 |
|
|
.text : @{ *(.text) @}
|
3640 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3641 |
|
|
@noindent
|
3642 |
|
|
are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
|
3643 |
|
|
@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
|
3644 |
|
|
counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
|
3645 |
|
|
counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
|
3646 |
|
|
section.
|
3647 |
|
|
|
3648 |
|
|
The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
|
3649 |
|
|
For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
|
3650 |
|
|
so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
|
3651 |
|
|
do something like this:
|
3652 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3653 |
|
|
.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
|
3654 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3655 |
|
|
@noindent
|
3656 |
|
|
This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
|
3657 |
|
|
aligned upward to the specified value.
|
3658 |
|
|
|
3659 |
|
|
Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
|
3660 |
|
|
location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
|
3661 |
|
|
sections are ignored).
|
3662 |
|
|
|
3663 |
|
|
@node Input Section
|
3664 |
|
|
@subsection Input Section Description
|
3665 |
|
|
@cindex input sections
|
3666 |
|
|
@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
|
3667 |
|
|
The most common output section command is an input section description.
|
3668 |
|
|
|
3669 |
|
|
The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
|
3670 |
|
|
You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
|
3671 |
|
|
in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
|
3672 |
|
|
map the input files into your memory layout.
|
3673 |
|
|
|
3674 |
|
|
@menu
|
3675 |
|
|
* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
|
3676 |
|
|
* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
|
3677 |
|
|
* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
|
3678 |
|
|
* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
|
3679 |
|
|
* Input Section Example:: Input section example
|
3680 |
|
|
@end menu
|
3681 |
|
|
|
3682 |
|
|
@node Input Section Basics
|
3683 |
|
|
@subsubsection Input Section Basics
|
3684 |
|
|
@cindex input section basics
|
3685 |
|
|
An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
|
3686 |
|
|
by a list of section names in parentheses.
|
3687 |
|
|
|
3688 |
|
|
The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
|
3689 |
|
|
describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
|
3690 |
|
|
|
3691 |
|
|
The most common input section description is to include all input
|
3692 |
|
|
sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
|
3693 |
|
|
include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
|
3694 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3695 |
|
|
*(.text)
|
3696 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3697 |
|
|
@noindent
|
3698 |
|
|
Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
|
3699 |
|
|
of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
|
3700 |
|
|
match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
|
3701 |
|
|
example:
|
3702 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3703 |
|
|
*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
|
3704 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3705 |
|
|
will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
|
3706 |
|
|
@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
|
3707 |
|
|
|
3708 |
|
|
There are two ways to include more than one section:
|
3709 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3710 |
|
|
*(.text .rdata)
|
3711 |
|
|
*(.text) *(.rdata)
|
3712 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3713 |
|
|
@noindent
|
3714 |
|
|
The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
|
3715 |
|
|
@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
|
3716 |
|
|
first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
|
3717 |
|
|
they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
|
3718 |
|
|
@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
|
3719 |
|
|
@samp{.rdata} input sections.
|
3720 |
|
|
|
3721 |
|
|
You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
|
3722 |
|
|
You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
|
3723 |
|
|
needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
|
3724 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3725 |
|
|
data.o(.data)
|
3726 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3727 |
|
|
|
3728 |
|
|
You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
|
3729 |
|
|
matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
|
3730 |
|
|
with no whitespace around the colon.
|
3731 |
|
|
|
3732 |
|
|
@table @samp
|
3733 |
|
|
@item archive:file
|
3734 |
|
|
matches file within archive
|
3735 |
|
|
@item archive:
|
3736 |
|
|
matches the whole archive
|
3737 |
|
|
@item :file
|
3738 |
|
|
matches file but not one in an archive
|
3739 |
|
|
@end table
|
3740 |
|
|
|
3741 |
|
|
Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
|
3742 |
|
|
wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
|
3743 |
|
|
single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
|
3744 |
|
|
@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
|
3745 |
|
|
within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
|
3746 |
|
|
also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
|
3747 |
|
|
other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
|
3748 |
|
|
from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
|
3749 |
|
|
command.
|
3750 |
|
|
|
3751 |
|
|
If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
|
3752 |
|
|
the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
|
3753 |
|
|
commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
|
3754 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3755 |
|
|
data.o
|
3756 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3757 |
|
|
|
3758 |
|
|
When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
|
3759 |
|
|
and does not contain any wild card
|
3760 |
|
|
characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
|
3761 |
|
|
name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
|
3762 |
|
|
did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
|
3763 |
|
|
though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
|
3764 |
|
|
@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
|
3765 |
|
|
the archive search path.
|
3766 |
|
|
|
3767 |
|
|
@node Input Section Wildcards
|
3768 |
|
|
@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
|
3769 |
|
|
@cindex input section wildcards
|
3770 |
|
|
@cindex wildcard file name patterns
|
3771 |
|
|
@cindex file name wildcard patterns
|
3772 |
|
|
@cindex section name wildcard patterns
|
3773 |
|
|
In an input section description, either the file name or the section
|
3774 |
|
|
name or both may be wildcard patterns.
|
3775 |
|
|
|
3776 |
|
|
The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
|
3777 |
|
|
pattern for the file name.
|
3778 |
|
|
|
3779 |
|
|
The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
|
3780 |
|
|
|
3781 |
|
|
@table @samp
|
3782 |
|
|
@item *
|
3783 |
|
|
matches any number of characters
|
3784 |
|
|
@item ?
|
3785 |
|
|
matches any single character
|
3786 |
|
|
@item [@var{chars}]
|
3787 |
|
|
matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
|
3788 |
|
|
character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
|
3789 |
|
|
@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
|
3790 |
|
|
@item \
|
3791 |
|
|
quotes the following character
|
3792 |
|
|
@end table
|
3793 |
|
|
|
3794 |
|
|
When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
|
3795 |
|
|
will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
|
3796 |
|
|
Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
|
3797 |
|
|
exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
|
3798 |
|
|
@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
|
3799 |
|
|
a @samp{/} character.
|
3800 |
|
|
|
3801 |
|
|
File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
|
3802 |
|
|
specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
|
3803 |
|
|
does not search directories to expand wildcards.
|
3804 |
|
|
|
3805 |
|
|
If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
|
3806 |
|
|
appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
|
3807 |
|
|
will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
|
3808 |
|
|
sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
|
3809 |
|
|
@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
|
3810 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3811 |
|
|
.data : @{ *(.data) @}
|
3812 |
|
|
.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
|
3813 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3814 |
|
|
|
3815 |
|
|
@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
|
3816 |
|
|
Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
|
3817 |
|
|
in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
|
3818 |
|
|
this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
|
3819 |
|
|
pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
|
3820 |
|
|
@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
|
3821 |
|
|
into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
|
3822 |
|
|
|
3823 |
|
|
@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
|
3824 |
|
|
@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
|
3825 |
|
|
difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
|
3826 |
|
|
ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
|
3827 |
|
|
|
3828 |
|
|
@cindex SORT
|
3829 |
|
|
@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
|
3830 |
|
|
|
3831 |
|
|
When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
|
3832 |
|
|
can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
|
3833 |
|
|
|
3834 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
3835 |
|
|
@item
|
3836 |
|
|
@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
|
3837 |
|
|
It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
|
3838 |
|
|
sections have the same name.
|
3839 |
|
|
@item
|
3840 |
|
|
@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
|
3841 |
|
|
It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
|
3842 |
|
|
sections have the same alignment.
|
3843 |
|
|
@item
|
3844 |
|
|
@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
|
3845 |
|
|
treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
|
3846 |
|
|
@item
|
3847 |
|
|
@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
|
3848 |
|
|
is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
|
3849 |
|
|
@item
|
3850 |
|
|
All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
|
3851 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
3852 |
|
|
|
3853 |
|
|
When both command line section sorting option and linker script
|
3854 |
|
|
section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
|
3855 |
|
|
takes precedence over the command line option.
|
3856 |
|
|
|
3857 |
|
|
If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
|
3858 |
|
|
command line option will make the section sorting command to be
|
3859 |
|
|
treated as nested sorting command.
|
3860 |
|
|
|
3861 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
3862 |
|
|
@item
|
3863 |
|
|
@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
|
3864 |
|
|
@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
|
3865 |
|
|
@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
|
3866 |
|
|
@item
|
3867 |
|
|
@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
|
3868 |
|
|
@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
|
3869 |
|
|
@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
|
3870 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
3871 |
|
|
|
3872 |
|
|
If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
|
3873 |
|
|
command line option will be ignored.
|
3874 |
|
|
|
3875 |
|
|
If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
|
3876 |
|
|
@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
|
3877 |
|
|
precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
|
3878 |
|
|
|
3879 |
|
|
This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
|
3880 |
|
|
files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
|
3881 |
|
|
sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
|
3882 |
|
|
The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
|
3883 |
|
|
with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
|
3884 |
|
|
linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
|
3885 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3886 |
|
|
@group
|
3887 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{
|
3888 |
|
|
.text : @{ *(.text) @}
|
3889 |
|
|
.DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
|
3890 |
|
|
.data : @{ *(.data) @}
|
3891 |
|
|
.bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
|
3892 |
|
|
@}
|
3893 |
|
|
@end group
|
3894 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3895 |
|
|
|
3896 |
|
|
@node Input Section Common
|
3897 |
|
|
@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
|
3898 |
|
|
@cindex common symbol placement
|
3899 |
|
|
@cindex uninitialized data placement
|
3900 |
|
|
A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
|
3901 |
|
|
file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
|
3902 |
|
|
linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
|
3903 |
|
|
named @samp{COMMON}.
|
3904 |
|
|
|
3905 |
|
|
You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
|
3906 |
|
|
other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
|
3907 |
|
|
particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
|
3908 |
|
|
input files are placed in another section.
|
3909 |
|
|
|
3910 |
|
|
In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
|
3911 |
|
|
@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
|
3912 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3913 |
|
|
.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
|
3914 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3915 |
|
|
|
3916 |
|
|
@cindex scommon section
|
3917 |
|
|
@cindex small common symbols
|
3918 |
|
|
Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
|
3919 |
|
|
example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
|
3920 |
|
|
symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
|
3921 |
|
|
different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
|
3922 |
|
|
the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
|
3923 |
|
|
symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
|
3924 |
|
|
to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
|
3925 |
|
|
locations.
|
3926 |
|
|
|
3927 |
|
|
@cindex [COMMON]
|
3928 |
|
|
You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
|
3929 |
|
|
notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
|
3930 |
|
|
@samp{*(COMMON)}.
|
3931 |
|
|
|
3932 |
|
|
@node Input Section Keep
|
3933 |
|
|
@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
|
3934 |
|
|
@cindex KEEP
|
3935 |
|
|
@cindex garbage collection
|
3936 |
|
|
When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
|
3937 |
|
|
it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
|
3938 |
|
|
This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
|
3939 |
|
|
with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
|
3940 |
|
|
@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
|
3941 |
|
|
|
3942 |
|
|
@node Input Section Example
|
3943 |
|
|
@subsubsection Input Section Example
|
3944 |
|
|
The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
|
3945 |
|
|
to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
|
3946 |
|
|
start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
|
3947 |
|
|
@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
|
3948 |
|
|
follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
|
3949 |
|
|
@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
|
3950 |
|
|
@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
|
3951 |
|
|
All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
|
3952 |
|
|
files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
|
3953 |
|
|
|
3954 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
3955 |
|
|
@group
|
3956 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{
|
3957 |
|
|
outputa 0x10000 :
|
3958 |
|
|
@{
|
3959 |
|
|
all.o
|
3960 |
|
|
foo.o (.input1)
|
3961 |
|
|
@}
|
3962 |
|
|
@end group
|
3963 |
|
|
@group
|
3964 |
|
|
outputb :
|
3965 |
|
|
@{
|
3966 |
|
|
foo.o (.input2)
|
3967 |
|
|
foo1.o (.input1)
|
3968 |
|
|
@}
|
3969 |
|
|
@end group
|
3970 |
|
|
@group
|
3971 |
|
|
outputc :
|
3972 |
|
|
@{
|
3973 |
|
|
*(.input1)
|
3974 |
|
|
*(.input2)
|
3975 |
|
|
@}
|
3976 |
|
|
@}
|
3977 |
|
|
@end group
|
3978 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
3979 |
|
|
|
3980 |
|
|
@node Output Section Data
|
3981 |
|
|
@subsection Output Section Data
|
3982 |
|
|
@cindex data
|
3983 |
|
|
@cindex section data
|
3984 |
|
|
@cindex output section data
|
3985 |
|
|
@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
|
3986 |
|
|
@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
|
3987 |
|
|
@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
|
3988 |
|
|
@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
|
3989 |
|
|
@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
|
3990 |
|
|
You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
|
3991 |
|
|
@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
|
3992 |
|
|
an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
|
3993 |
|
|
parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
|
3994 |
|
|
value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
|
3995 |
|
|
counter.
|
3996 |
|
|
|
3997 |
|
|
The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
|
3998 |
|
|
store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
|
3999 |
|
|
bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
|
4000 |
|
|
stored.
|
4001 |
|
|
|
4002 |
|
|
For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
|
4003 |
|
|
of the symbol @samp{addr}:
|
4004 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4005 |
|
|
BYTE(1)
|
4006 |
|
|
LONG(addr)
|
4007 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4008 |
|
|
|
4009 |
|
|
When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
|
4010 |
|
|
same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
|
4011 |
|
|
target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
|
4012 |
|
|
@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
|
4013 |
|
|
@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
|
4014 |
|
|
|
4015 |
|
|
If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
|
4016 |
|
|
which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
|
4017 |
|
|
When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
|
4018 |
|
|
true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
|
4019 |
|
|
endianness of the first input object file.
|
4020 |
|
|
|
4021 |
|
|
Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
|
4022 |
|
|
between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
|
4023 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4024 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
|
4025 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4026 |
|
|
whereas this will work:
|
4027 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4028 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
|
4029 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4030 |
|
|
|
4031 |
|
|
@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
|
4032 |
|
|
@cindex holes, filling
|
4033 |
|
|
@cindex unspecified memory
|
4034 |
|
|
You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
|
4035 |
|
|
current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
|
4036 |
|
|
otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
|
4037 |
|
|
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
|
4038 |
|
|
with the value of the expression, repeated as
|
4039 |
|
|
necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
|
4040 |
|
|
point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
|
4041 |
|
|
than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
|
4042 |
|
|
different parts of an output section.
|
4043 |
|
|
|
4044 |
|
|
This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
|
4045 |
|
|
value @samp{0x90}:
|
4046 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4047 |
|
|
FILL(0x90909090)
|
4048 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4049 |
|
|
|
4050 |
|
|
The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
|
4051 |
|
|
section attribute, but it only affects the
|
4052 |
|
|
part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
|
4053 |
|
|
entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
|
4054 |
|
|
precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
|
4055 |
|
|
expression.
|
4056 |
|
|
|
4057 |
|
|
@node Output Section Keywords
|
4058 |
|
|
@subsection Output Section Keywords
|
4059 |
|
|
There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
|
4060 |
|
|
commands.
|
4061 |
|
|
|
4062 |
|
|
@table @code
|
4063 |
|
|
@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
|
4064 |
|
|
@cindex input filename symbols
|
4065 |
|
|
@cindex filename symbols
|
4066 |
|
|
@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
|
4067 |
|
|
The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
|
4068 |
|
|
The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
|
4069 |
|
|
file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
|
4070 |
|
|
the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
|
4071 |
|
|
|
4072 |
|
|
This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
|
4073 |
|
|
normally used for any other object file format.
|
4074 |
|
|
|
4075 |
|
|
@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
|
4076 |
|
|
@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
|
4077 |
|
|
@cindex constructors, arranging in link
|
4078 |
|
|
@item CONSTRUCTORS
|
4079 |
|
|
When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
|
4080 |
|
|
unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
|
4081 |
|
|
destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
|
4082 |
|
|
arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
|
4083 |
|
|
automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
|
4084 |
|
|
For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
|
4085 |
|
|
linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
|
4086 |
|
|
@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
|
4087 |
|
|
ignored for other object file formats.
|
4088 |
|
|
|
4089 |
|
|
The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
|
4090 |
|
|
constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
|
4091 |
|
|
Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
|
4092 |
|
|
the start and end of the global destructors. The
|
4093 |
|
|
first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
|
4094 |
|
|
of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
|
4095 |
|
|
compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
|
4096 |
|
|
formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
|
4097 |
|
|
@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
|
4098 |
|
|
the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
|
4099 |
|
|
destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
|
4100 |
|
|
@code{exit}.
|
4101 |
|
|
|
4102 |
|
|
For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
|
4103 |
|
|
arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
|
4104 |
|
|
addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
|
4105 |
|
|
and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
|
4106 |
|
|
linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
|
4107 |
|
|
runtime code expects to see.
|
4108 |
|
|
|
4109 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4110 |
|
|
__CTOR_LIST__ = .;
|
4111 |
|
|
LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
|
4112 |
|
|
*(.ctors)
|
4113 |
|
|
LONG(0)
|
4114 |
|
|
__CTOR_END__ = .;
|
4115 |
|
|
__DTOR_LIST__ = .;
|
4116 |
|
|
LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
|
4117 |
|
|
*(.dtors)
|
4118 |
|
|
LONG(0)
|
4119 |
|
|
__DTOR_END__ = .;
|
4120 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4121 |
|
|
|
4122 |
|
|
If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
|
4123 |
|
|
which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
|
4124 |
|
|
are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
|
4125 |
|
|
are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
|
4126 |
|
|
command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
|
4127 |
|
|
@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
|
4128 |
|
|
@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
|
4129 |
|
|
@samp{*(.dtors)}.
|
4130 |
|
|
|
4131 |
|
|
Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
|
4132 |
|
|
and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
|
4133 |
|
|
need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
|
4134 |
|
|
scripts.
|
4135 |
|
|
|
4136 |
|
|
@end table
|
4137 |
|
|
|
4138 |
|
|
@node Output Section Discarding
|
4139 |
|
|
@subsection Output Section Discarding
|
4140 |
|
|
@cindex discarding sections
|
4141 |
|
|
@cindex sections, discarding
|
4142 |
|
|
@cindex removing sections
|
4143 |
|
|
The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
|
4144 |
|
|
for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
|
4145 |
|
|
be present in any of the input files. For example:
|
4146 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4147 |
|
|
.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
|
4148 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4149 |
|
|
@noindent
|
4150 |
|
|
will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
|
4151 |
|
|
@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
|
4152 |
|
|
sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
|
4153 |
|
|
space in an output section will also create the output section.
|
4154 |
|
|
|
4155 |
|
|
The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
|
4156 |
|
|
on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
|
4157 |
|
|
symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
|
4158 |
|
|
the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
|
4159 |
|
|
section is discarded.
|
4160 |
|
|
|
4161 |
|
|
@cindex /DISCARD/
|
4162 |
|
|
The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
|
4163 |
|
|
input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
|
4164 |
|
|
section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
|
4165 |
|
|
|
4166 |
|
|
@node Output Section Attributes
|
4167 |
|
|
@subsection Output Section Attributes
|
4168 |
|
|
@cindex output section attributes
|
4169 |
|
|
We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
|
4170 |
|
|
like this:
|
4171 |
|
|
|
4172 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4173 |
|
|
@group
|
4174 |
|
|
@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
|
4175 |
|
|
[AT(@var{lma})]
|
4176 |
|
|
[ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
|
4177 |
|
|
[SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
|
4178 |
|
|
[@var{constraint}]
|
4179 |
|
|
@{
|
4180 |
|
|
@var{output-section-command}
|
4181 |
|
|
@var{output-section-command}
|
4182 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
4183 |
|
|
@} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
|
4184 |
|
|
@end group
|
4185 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4186 |
|
|
|
4187 |
|
|
We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
|
4188 |
|
|
@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
|
4189 |
|
|
remaining section attributes.
|
4190 |
|
|
|
4191 |
|
|
@menu
|
4192 |
|
|
* Output Section Type:: Output section type
|
4193 |
|
|
* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
|
4194 |
|
|
* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
|
4195 |
|
|
* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
|
4196 |
|
|
* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
|
4197 |
|
|
* Output Section Region:: Output section region
|
4198 |
|
|
* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
|
4199 |
|
|
* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
|
4200 |
|
|
@end menu
|
4201 |
|
|
|
4202 |
|
|
@node Output Section Type
|
4203 |
|
|
@subsubsection Output Section Type
|
4204 |
|
|
Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
|
4205 |
|
|
parentheses. The following types are defined:
|
4206 |
|
|
|
4207 |
|
|
@table @code
|
4208 |
|
|
@item NOLOAD
|
4209 |
|
|
The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
|
4210 |
|
|
loaded into memory when the program is run.
|
4211 |
|
|
@item DSECT
|
4212 |
|
|
@itemx COPY
|
4213 |
|
|
@itemx INFO
|
4214 |
|
|
@itemx OVERLAY
|
4215 |
|
|
These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
|
4216 |
|
|
rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
|
4217 |
|
|
marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
|
4218 |
|
|
section when the program is run.
|
4219 |
|
|
@end table
|
4220 |
|
|
|
4221 |
|
|
@kindex NOLOAD
|
4222 |
|
|
@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
|
4223 |
|
|
@cindex loading, preventing
|
4224 |
|
|
The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
|
4225 |
|
|
the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
|
4226 |
|
|
the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
|
4227 |
|
|
@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
|
4228 |
|
|
need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
|
4229 |
|
|
@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
|
4230 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4231 |
|
|
@group
|
4232 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{
|
4233 |
|
|
ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
|
4234 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
4235 |
|
|
@}
|
4236 |
|
|
@end group
|
4237 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4238 |
|
|
|
4239 |
|
|
@node Output Section LMA
|
4240 |
|
|
@subsubsection Output Section LMA
|
4241 |
|
|
@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
|
4242 |
|
|
@kindex AT(@var{lma})
|
4243 |
|
|
@cindex load address
|
4244 |
|
|
@cindex section load address
|
4245 |
|
|
Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
|
4246 |
|
|
@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
|
4247 |
|
|
an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
|
4248 |
|
|
Address}).
|
4249 |
|
|
|
4250 |
|
|
The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
|
4251 |
|
|
the load address of the section.
|
4252 |
|
|
|
4253 |
|
|
Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
|
4254 |
|
|
specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
|
4255 |
|
|
Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
|
4256 |
|
|
linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
|
4257 |
|
|
|
4258 |
|
|
If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
|
4259 |
|
|
section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
|
4260 |
|
|
VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
|
4261 |
|
|
section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
|
4262 |
|
|
or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
|
4263 |
|
|
to the VMA.
|
4264 |
|
|
@xref{Output Section Region}.
|
4265 |
|
|
|
4266 |
|
|
@cindex ROM initialized data
|
4267 |
|
|
@cindex initialized data in ROM
|
4268 |
|
|
This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
|
4269 |
|
|
example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
|
4270 |
|
|
called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
|
4271 |
|
|
@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
|
4272 |
|
|
even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
|
4273 |
|
|
uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
|
4274 |
|
|
defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
|
4275 |
|
|
counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
|
4276 |
|
|
|
4277 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4278 |
|
|
@group
|
4279 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
4280 |
|
|
@{
|
4281 |
|
|
.text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
|
4282 |
|
|
.mdata 0x2000 :
|
4283 |
|
|
AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
|
4284 |
|
|
@{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
|
4285 |
|
|
.bss 0x3000 :
|
4286 |
|
|
@{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
|
4287 |
|
|
@}
|
4288 |
|
|
@end group
|
4289 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4290 |
|
|
|
4291 |
|
|
The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
|
4292 |
|
|
this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
|
4293 |
|
|
the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
|
4294 |
|
|
how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
|
4295 |
|
|
script.
|
4296 |
|
|
|
4297 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4298 |
|
|
@group
|
4299 |
|
|
extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
|
4300 |
|
|
char *src = &_etext;
|
4301 |
|
|
char *dst = &_data;
|
4302 |
|
|
|
4303 |
|
|
/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
|
4304 |
|
|
while (dst < &_edata) @{
|
4305 |
|
|
*dst++ = *src++;
|
4306 |
|
|
@}
|
4307 |
|
|
|
4308 |
|
|
/* Zero bss */
|
4309 |
|
|
for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
|
4310 |
|
|
*dst = 0;
|
4311 |
|
|
@end group
|
4312 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4313 |
|
|
|
4314 |
|
|
@node Forced Output Alignment
|
4315 |
|
|
@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
|
4316 |
|
|
@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
|
4317 |
|
|
@cindex forcing output section alignment
|
4318 |
|
|
@cindex output section alignment
|
4319 |
|
|
You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
|
4320 |
|
|
|
4321 |
|
|
@node Forced Input Alignment
|
4322 |
|
|
@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
|
4323 |
|
|
@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
|
4324 |
|
|
@cindex forcing input section alignment
|
4325 |
|
|
@cindex input section alignment
|
4326 |
|
|
You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
|
4327 |
|
|
SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
|
4328 |
|
|
sections, whether larger or smaller.
|
4329 |
|
|
|
4330 |
|
|
@node Output Section Constraint
|
4331 |
|
|
@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
|
4332 |
|
|
@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
|
4333 |
|
|
@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
|
4334 |
|
|
@cindex constraints on output sections
|
4335 |
|
|
You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
|
4336 |
|
|
of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
|
4337 |
|
|
read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
|
4338 |
|
|
@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
|
4339 |
|
|
|
4340 |
|
|
@node Output Section Region
|
4341 |
|
|
@subsubsection Output Section Region
|
4342 |
|
|
@kindex >@var{region}
|
4343 |
|
|
@cindex section, assigning to memory region
|
4344 |
|
|
@cindex memory regions and sections
|
4345 |
|
|
You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
|
4346 |
|
|
using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
|
4347 |
|
|
|
4348 |
|
|
Here is a simple example:
|
4349 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4350 |
|
|
@group
|
4351 |
|
|
MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
|
4352 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
|
4353 |
|
|
@end group
|
4354 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4355 |
|
|
|
4356 |
|
|
@node Output Section Phdr
|
4357 |
|
|
@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
|
4358 |
|
|
@kindex :@var{phdr}
|
4359 |
|
|
@cindex section, assigning to program header
|
4360 |
|
|
@cindex program headers and sections
|
4361 |
|
|
You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
|
4362 |
|
|
using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
|
4363 |
|
|
one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
|
4364 |
|
|
assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
|
4365 |
|
|
@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
|
4366 |
|
|
linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
|
4367 |
|
|
|
4368 |
|
|
Here is a simple example:
|
4369 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4370 |
|
|
@group
|
4371 |
|
|
PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
|
4372 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
|
4373 |
|
|
@end group
|
4374 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4375 |
|
|
|
4376 |
|
|
@node Output Section Fill
|
4377 |
|
|
@subsubsection Output Section Fill
|
4378 |
|
|
@kindex =@var{fillexp}
|
4379 |
|
|
@cindex section fill pattern
|
4380 |
|
|
@cindex fill pattern, entire section
|
4381 |
|
|
You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
|
4382 |
|
|
@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
|
4383 |
|
|
(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
|
4384 |
|
|
within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
|
4385 |
|
|
alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
|
4386 |
|
|
necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
|
4387 |
|
|
of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
|
4388 |
|
|
an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
|
4389 |
|
|
fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
|
4390 |
|
|
other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
|
4391 |
|
|
pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
|
4392 |
|
|
expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
|
4393 |
|
|
|
4394 |
|
|
You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
|
4395 |
|
|
output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
|
4396 |
|
|
|
4397 |
|
|
Here is a simple example:
|
4398 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4399 |
|
|
@group
|
4400 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
|
4401 |
|
|
@end group
|
4402 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4403 |
|
|
|
4404 |
|
|
@node Overlay Description
|
4405 |
|
|
@subsection Overlay Description
|
4406 |
|
|
@kindex OVERLAY
|
4407 |
|
|
@cindex overlays
|
4408 |
|
|
An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
|
4409 |
|
|
are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
|
4410 |
|
|
the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
|
4411 |
|
|
copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
|
4412 |
|
|
required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
|
4413 |
|
|
can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
|
4414 |
|
|
than another.
|
4415 |
|
|
|
4416 |
|
|
Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
|
4417 |
|
|
@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
|
4418 |
|
|
output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
|
4419 |
|
|
command is as follows:
|
4420 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4421 |
|
|
@group
|
4422 |
|
|
OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
|
4423 |
|
|
@{
|
4424 |
|
|
@var{secname1}
|
4425 |
|
|
@{
|
4426 |
|
|
@var{output-section-command}
|
4427 |
|
|
@var{output-section-command}
|
4428 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
4429 |
|
|
@} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
|
4430 |
|
|
@var{secname2}
|
4431 |
|
|
@{
|
4432 |
|
|
@var{output-section-command}
|
4433 |
|
|
@var{output-section-command}
|
4434 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
4435 |
|
|
@} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
|
4436 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
4437 |
|
|
@} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
|
4438 |
|
|
@end group
|
4439 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4440 |
|
|
|
4441 |
|
|
Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
|
4442 |
|
|
section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
|
4443 |
|
|
section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
|
4444 |
|
|
those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
|
4445 |
|
|
except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
|
4446 |
|
|
sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
|
4447 |
|
|
|
4448 |
|
|
The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
|
4449 |
|
|
addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
|
4450 |
|
|
memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
|
4451 |
|
|
whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
|
4452 |
|
|
and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
|
4453 |
|
|
and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
|
4454 |
|
|
|
4455 |
|
|
If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
|
4456 |
|
|
among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
|
4457 |
|
|
all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
|
4458 |
|
|
section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
|
4459 |
|
|
NOCROSSREFS}.
|
4460 |
|
|
|
4461 |
|
|
For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
|
4462 |
|
|
provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
|
4463 |
|
|
defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
|
4464 |
|
|
@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
|
4465 |
|
|
the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
|
4466 |
|
|
within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
|
4467 |
|
|
symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
|
4468 |
|
|
|
4469 |
|
|
At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
|
4470 |
|
|
the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
|
4471 |
|
|
|
4472 |
|
|
Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
|
4473 |
|
|
@code{SECTIONS} construct.
|
4474 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4475 |
|
|
@group
|
4476 |
|
|
OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
|
4477 |
|
|
@{
|
4478 |
|
|
.text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
|
4479 |
|
|
.text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
|
4480 |
|
|
@}
|
4481 |
|
|
@end group
|
4482 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4483 |
|
|
@noindent
|
4484 |
|
|
This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
|
4485 |
|
|
address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
|
4486 |
|
|
@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
|
4487 |
|
|
following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
|
4488 |
|
|
@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
|
4489 |
|
|
@code{__load_stop_text1}.
|
4490 |
|
|
|
4491 |
|
|
C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
|
4492 |
|
|
like the following.
|
4493 |
|
|
|
4494 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4495 |
|
|
@group
|
4496 |
|
|
extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
|
4497 |
|
|
memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
|
4498 |
|
|
&__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
|
4499 |
|
|
@end group
|
4500 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4501 |
|
|
|
4502 |
|
|
Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
|
4503 |
|
|
everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
|
4504 |
|
|
example could have been written identically as follows.
|
4505 |
|
|
|
4506 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4507 |
|
|
@group
|
4508 |
|
|
.text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
|
4509 |
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
|
4510 |
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
|
4511 |
|
|
.text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
|
4512 |
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
|
4513 |
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
|
4514 |
|
|
. = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
|
4515 |
|
|
@end group
|
4516 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4517 |
|
|
|
4518 |
|
|
@node MEMORY
|
4519 |
|
|
@section MEMORY Command
|
4520 |
|
|
@kindex MEMORY
|
4521 |
|
|
@cindex memory regions
|
4522 |
|
|
@cindex regions of memory
|
4523 |
|
|
@cindex allocating memory
|
4524 |
|
|
@cindex discontinuous memory
|
4525 |
|
|
The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
|
4526 |
|
|
memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
|
4527 |
|
|
|
4528 |
|
|
The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
|
4529 |
|
|
memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
|
4530 |
|
|
may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
|
4531 |
|
|
can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
|
4532 |
|
|
set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
|
4533 |
|
|
regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
|
4534 |
|
|
around to fit into the available regions.
|
4535 |
|
|
|
4536 |
|
|
A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
|
4537 |
|
|
command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
|
4538 |
|
|
you wish. The syntax is:
|
4539 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4540 |
|
|
@group
|
4541 |
|
|
MEMORY
|
4542 |
|
|
@{
|
4543 |
|
|
@var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
|
4544 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
4545 |
|
|
@}
|
4546 |
|
|
@end group
|
4547 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4548 |
|
|
|
4549 |
|
|
The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
|
4550 |
|
|
region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
|
4551 |
|
|
Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
|
4552 |
|
|
with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
|
4553 |
|
|
must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
|
4554 |
|
|
add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
|
4555 |
|
|
command.
|
4556 |
|
|
|
4557 |
|
|
@cindex memory region attributes
|
4558 |
|
|
The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
|
4559 |
|
|
whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
|
4560 |
|
|
not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
|
4561 |
|
|
@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
|
4562 |
|
|
section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
|
4563 |
|
|
the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
|
4564 |
|
|
them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
|
4565 |
|
|
|
4566 |
|
|
The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
|
4567 |
|
|
@table @samp
|
4568 |
|
|
@item R
|
4569 |
|
|
Read-only section
|
4570 |
|
|
@item W
|
4571 |
|
|
Read/write section
|
4572 |
|
|
@item X
|
4573 |
|
|
Executable section
|
4574 |
|
|
@item A
|
4575 |
|
|
Allocatable section
|
4576 |
|
|
@item I
|
4577 |
|
|
Initialized section
|
4578 |
|
|
@item L
|
4579 |
|
|
Same as @samp{I}
|
4580 |
|
|
@item !
|
4581 |
|
|
Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
|
4582 |
|
|
@end table
|
4583 |
|
|
|
4584 |
|
|
If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
|
4585 |
|
|
@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
|
4586 |
|
|
attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
|
4587 |
|
|
in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
|
4588 |
|
|
attributes.
|
4589 |
|
|
|
4590 |
|
|
@kindex ORIGIN =
|
4591 |
|
|
@kindex o =
|
4592 |
|
|
@kindex org =
|
4593 |
|
|
The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
|
4594 |
|
|
the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
|
4595 |
|
|
cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
|
4596 |
|
|
abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
|
4597 |
|
|
@code{ORG}).
|
4598 |
|
|
|
4599 |
|
|
@kindex LENGTH =
|
4600 |
|
|
@kindex len =
|
4601 |
|
|
@kindex l =
|
4602 |
|
|
The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
|
4603 |
|
|
region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
|
4604 |
|
|
be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
|
4605 |
|
|
@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
|
4606 |
|
|
|
4607 |
|
|
In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
|
4608 |
|
|
available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
|
4609 |
|
|
and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
|
4610 |
|
|
linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
|
4611 |
|
|
is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
|
4612 |
|
|
or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
|
4613 |
|
|
explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
|
4614 |
|
|
region.
|
4615 |
|
|
|
4616 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4617 |
|
|
@group
|
4618 |
|
|
MEMORY
|
4619 |
|
|
@{
|
4620 |
|
|
rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
|
4621 |
|
|
ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
|
4622 |
|
|
@}
|
4623 |
|
|
@end group
|
4624 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4625 |
|
|
|
4626 |
|
|
Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
|
4627 |
|
|
specific output sections into that memory region by using the
|
4628 |
|
|
@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
|
4629 |
|
|
a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
|
4630 |
|
|
output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
|
4631 |
|
|
was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
|
4632 |
|
|
the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
|
4633 |
|
|
output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
|
4634 |
|
|
region, the linker will issue an error message.
|
4635 |
|
|
|
4636 |
|
|
It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
|
4637 |
|
|
expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
|
4638 |
|
|
@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
|
4639 |
|
|
|
4640 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4641 |
|
|
@group
|
4642 |
|
|
_fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
|
4643 |
|
|
@end group
|
4644 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4645 |
|
|
|
4646 |
|
|
@node PHDRS
|
4647 |
|
|
@section PHDRS Command
|
4648 |
|
|
@kindex PHDRS
|
4649 |
|
|
@cindex program headers
|
4650 |
|
|
@cindex ELF program headers
|
4651 |
|
|
@cindex program segments
|
4652 |
|
|
@cindex segments, ELF
|
4653 |
|
|
The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
|
4654 |
|
|
@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
|
4655 |
|
|
loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
|
4656 |
|
|
program with the @samp{-p} option.
|
4657 |
|
|
|
4658 |
|
|
When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
|
4659 |
|
|
reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
|
4660 |
|
|
program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
|
4661 |
|
|
This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
|
4662 |
|
|
interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
|
4663 |
|
|
|
4664 |
|
|
The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
|
4665 |
|
|
in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
|
4666 |
|
|
precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
|
4667 |
|
|
the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
|
4668 |
|
|
not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
|
4669 |
|
|
|
4670 |
|
|
The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
|
4671 |
|
|
generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
|
4672 |
|
|
ignore @code{PHDRS}.
|
4673 |
|
|
|
4674 |
|
|
This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
|
4675 |
|
|
@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
|
4676 |
|
|
|
4677 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4678 |
|
|
@group
|
4679 |
|
|
PHDRS
|
4680 |
|
|
@{
|
4681 |
|
|
@var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
|
4682 |
|
|
[ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
|
4683 |
|
|
@}
|
4684 |
|
|
@end group
|
4685 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4686 |
|
|
|
4687 |
|
|
The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
|
4688 |
|
|
of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
|
4689 |
|
|
header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
|
4690 |
|
|
with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
|
4691 |
|
|
must have a distinct name.
|
4692 |
|
|
|
4693 |
|
|
Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
|
4694 |
|
|
system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
|
4695 |
|
|
specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
|
4696 |
|
|
sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
|
4697 |
|
|
attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
|
4698 |
|
|
Section Phdr}.
|
4699 |
|
|
|
4700 |
|
|
It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
|
4701 |
|
|
merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
|
4702 |
|
|
repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
|
4703 |
|
|
contain the section.
|
4704 |
|
|
|
4705 |
|
|
If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
|
4706 |
|
|
then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
|
4707 |
|
|
not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
|
4708 |
|
|
convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
|
4709 |
|
|
placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
|
4710 |
|
|
default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
|
4711 |
|
|
segment at all.
|
4712 |
|
|
|
4713 |
|
|
@kindex FILEHDR
|
4714 |
|
|
@kindex PHDRS
|
4715 |
|
|
You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
|
4716 |
|
|
the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
|
4717 |
|
|
The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
|
4718 |
|
|
file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
|
4719 |
|
|
include the ELF program headers themselves.
|
4720 |
|
|
|
4721 |
|
|
The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
|
4722 |
|
|
value of the keyword.
|
4723 |
|
|
|
4724 |
|
|
@table @asis
|
4725 |
|
|
@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
|
4726 |
|
|
Indicates an unused program header.
|
4727 |
|
|
|
4728 |
|
|
@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
|
4729 |
|
|
Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
|
4730 |
|
|
the file.
|
4731 |
|
|
|
4732 |
|
|
@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
|
4733 |
|
|
Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
|
4734 |
|
|
|
4735 |
|
|
@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
|
4736 |
|
|
Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
|
4737 |
|
|
found.
|
4738 |
|
|
|
4739 |
|
|
@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
|
4740 |
|
|
Indicates a segment holding note information.
|
4741 |
|
|
|
4742 |
|
|
@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
|
4743 |
|
|
A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
|
4744 |
|
|
ABI.
|
4745 |
|
|
|
4746 |
|
|
@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
|
4747 |
|
|
Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
|
4748 |
|
|
|
4749 |
|
|
@item @var{expression}
|
4750 |
|
|
An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
|
4751 |
|
|
be used for types not defined above.
|
4752 |
|
|
@end table
|
4753 |
|
|
|
4754 |
|
|
You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
|
4755 |
|
|
in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
|
4756 |
|
|
@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
|
4757 |
|
|
Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
|
4758 |
|
|
output section attribute.
|
4759 |
|
|
|
4760 |
|
|
The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
|
4761 |
|
|
which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
|
4762 |
|
|
explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
|
4763 |
|
|
an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
|
4764 |
|
|
header.
|
4765 |
|
|
|
4766 |
|
|
Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
|
4767 |
|
|
headers used on a native ELF system.
|
4768 |
|
|
|
4769 |
|
|
@example
|
4770 |
|
|
@group
|
4771 |
|
|
PHDRS
|
4772 |
|
|
@{
|
4773 |
|
|
headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
|
4774 |
|
|
interp PT_INTERP ;
|
4775 |
|
|
text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
|
4776 |
|
|
data PT_LOAD ;
|
4777 |
|
|
dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
|
4778 |
|
|
@}
|
4779 |
|
|
|
4780 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
4781 |
|
|
@{
|
4782 |
|
|
. = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
|
4783 |
|
|
.interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
|
4784 |
|
|
.text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
|
4785 |
|
|
.rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
|
4786 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
4787 |
|
|
. = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
|
4788 |
|
|
.data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
|
4789 |
|
|
.dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
|
4790 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
4791 |
|
|
@}
|
4792 |
|
|
@end group
|
4793 |
|
|
@end example
|
4794 |
|
|
|
4795 |
|
|
@node VERSION
|
4796 |
|
|
@section VERSION Command
|
4797 |
|
|
@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
|
4798 |
|
|
@cindex symbol versions
|
4799 |
|
|
@cindex version script
|
4800 |
|
|
@cindex versions of symbols
|
4801 |
|
|
The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
|
4802 |
|
|
only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
|
4803 |
|
|
symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
|
4804 |
|
|
a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
|
4805 |
|
|
shared library.
|
4806 |
|
|
|
4807 |
|
|
You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
|
4808 |
|
|
you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
|
4809 |
|
|
also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
|
4810 |
|
|
|
4811 |
|
|
The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
|
4812 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4813 |
|
|
VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
|
4814 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4815 |
|
|
|
4816 |
|
|
The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
|
4817 |
|
|
Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
|
4818 |
|
|
version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
|
4819 |
|
|
version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
|
4820 |
|
|
version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
|
4821 |
|
|
scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
|
4822 |
|
|
library.
|
4823 |
|
|
|
4824 |
|
|
The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
|
4825 |
|
|
examples.
|
4826 |
|
|
|
4827 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4828 |
|
|
VERS_1.1 @{
|
4829 |
|
|
global:
|
4830 |
|
|
foo1;
|
4831 |
|
|
local:
|
4832 |
|
|
old*;
|
4833 |
|
|
original*;
|
4834 |
|
|
new*;
|
4835 |
|
|
@};
|
4836 |
|
|
|
4837 |
|
|
VERS_1.2 @{
|
4838 |
|
|
foo2;
|
4839 |
|
|
@} VERS_1.1;
|
4840 |
|
|
|
4841 |
|
|
VERS_2.0 @{
|
4842 |
|
|
bar1; bar2;
|
4843 |
|
|
extern "C++" @{
|
4844 |
|
|
ns::*;
|
4845 |
|
|
"int f(int, double)";
|
4846 |
|
|
@}
|
4847 |
|
|
@} VERS_1.2;
|
4848 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4849 |
|
|
|
4850 |
|
|
This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
|
4851 |
|
|
version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
|
4852 |
|
|
The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
|
4853 |
|
|
a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
|
4854 |
|
|
of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
|
4855 |
|
|
symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
|
4856 |
|
|
is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
|
4857 |
|
|
in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
|
4858 |
|
|
However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
|
4859 |
|
|
name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
|
4860 |
|
|
|
4861 |
|
|
Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
|
4862 |
|
|
depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
|
4863 |
|
|
to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
|
4864 |
|
|
|
4865 |
|
|
Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
|
4866 |
|
|
depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
|
4867 |
|
|
and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
|
4868 |
|
|
|
4869 |
|
|
When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
|
4870 |
|
|
specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
|
4871 |
|
|
unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
|
4872 |
|
|
unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
|
4873 |
|
|
somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
|
4874 |
|
|
wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
|
4875 |
|
|
wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
|
4876 |
|
|
set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
|
4877 |
|
|
ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
|
4878 |
|
|
|
4879 |
|
|
The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
|
4880 |
|
|
they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
|
4881 |
|
|
could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
|
4882 |
|
|
However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
|
4883 |
|
|
|
4884 |
|
|
Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
|
4885 |
|
|
in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
|
4886 |
|
|
symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
|
4887 |
|
|
won't.
|
4888 |
|
|
|
4889 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4890 |
|
|
@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
|
4891 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4892 |
|
|
|
4893 |
|
|
When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
|
4894 |
|
|
symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
|
4895 |
|
|
requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
|
4896 |
|
|
shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
|
4897 |
|
|
loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
|
4898 |
|
|
linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
|
4899 |
|
|
application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
|
4900 |
|
|
way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
|
4901 |
|
|
all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
|
4902 |
|
|
search for each symbol reference.
|
4903 |
|
|
|
4904 |
|
|
The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
|
4905 |
|
|
doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
|
4906 |
|
|
that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
|
4907 |
|
|
functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
|
4908 |
|
|
the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
|
4909 |
|
|
required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
|
4910 |
|
|
that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
|
4911 |
|
|
versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
|
4912 |
|
|
the libraries being used with the application are too old.
|
4913 |
|
|
|
4914 |
|
|
There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
|
4915 |
|
|
first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
|
4916 |
|
|
source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
|
4917 |
|
|
script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
|
4918 |
|
|
maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
|
4919 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4920 |
|
|
__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
|
4921 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4922 |
|
|
@noindent
|
4923 |
|
|
in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
|
4924 |
|
|
be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
|
4925 |
|
|
The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
|
4926 |
|
|
@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
|
4927 |
|
|
takes precedence over a version script.
|
4928 |
|
|
|
4929 |
|
|
The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
|
4930 |
|
|
function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
|
4931 |
|
|
an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
|
4932 |
|
|
version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
|
4933 |
|
|
linked against the old interface to continue to function.
|
4934 |
|
|
|
4935 |
|
|
To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
|
4936 |
|
|
source file. Here is an example:
|
4937 |
|
|
|
4938 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4939 |
|
|
__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
|
4940 |
|
|
__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
|
4941 |
|
|
__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
|
4942 |
|
|
__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
|
4943 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4944 |
|
|
|
4945 |
|
|
In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
|
4946 |
|
|
unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
|
4947 |
|
|
example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
|
4948 |
|
|
@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
|
4949 |
|
|
|
4950 |
|
|
When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
|
4951 |
|
|
some way to specify a default version to which external references to
|
4952 |
|
|
this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
|
4953 |
|
|
@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
|
4954 |
|
|
declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
|
4955 |
|
|
you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
|
4956 |
|
|
|
4957 |
|
|
If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
|
4958 |
|
|
within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
|
4959 |
|
|
(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
|
4960 |
|
|
specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
|
4961 |
|
|
|
4962 |
|
|
You can also specify the language in the version script:
|
4963 |
|
|
|
4964 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
4965 |
|
|
VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
|
4966 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
4967 |
|
|
|
4968 |
|
|
The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
|
4969 |
|
|
The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
|
4970 |
|
|
demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
|
4971 |
|
|
patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
|
4972 |
|
|
|
4973 |
|
|
Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
|
4974 |
|
|
described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
|
4975 |
|
|
or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
|
4976 |
|
|
the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
|
4977 |
|
|
whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
|
4978 |
|
|
cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
|
4979 |
|
|
might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
|
4980 |
|
|
should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
|
4981 |
|
|
expect when you upgrade.
|
4982 |
|
|
|
4983 |
|
|
@node Expressions
|
4984 |
|
|
@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
|
4985 |
|
|
@cindex expressions
|
4986 |
|
|
@cindex arithmetic
|
4987 |
|
|
The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
|
4988 |
|
|
that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
|
4989 |
|
|
expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
|
4990 |
|
|
host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
|
4991 |
|
|
|
4992 |
|
|
You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
|
4993 |
|
|
|
4994 |
|
|
The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
|
4995 |
|
|
expressions.
|
4996 |
|
|
|
4997 |
|
|
@menu
|
4998 |
|
|
* Constants:: Constants
|
4999 |
|
|
* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
|
5000 |
|
|
* Symbols:: Symbol Names
|
5001 |
|
|
* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
|
5002 |
|
|
* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
|
5003 |
|
|
* Operators:: Operators
|
5004 |
|
|
* Evaluation:: Evaluation
|
5005 |
|
|
* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
|
5006 |
|
|
* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
|
5007 |
|
|
@end menu
|
5008 |
|
|
|
5009 |
|
|
@node Constants
|
5010 |
|
|
@subsection Constants
|
5011 |
|
|
@cindex integer notation
|
5012 |
|
|
@cindex constants in linker scripts
|
5013 |
|
|
All constants are integers.
|
5014 |
|
|
|
5015 |
|
|
As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
|
5016 |
|
|
octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
|
5017 |
|
|
hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
|
5018 |
|
|
@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
|
5019 |
|
|
@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
|
5020 |
|
|
value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
|
5021 |
|
|
|
5022 |
|
|
@cindex scaled integers
|
5023 |
|
|
@cindex K and M integer suffixes
|
5024 |
|
|
@cindex M and K integer suffixes
|
5025 |
|
|
@cindex suffixes for integers
|
5026 |
|
|
@cindex integer suffixes
|
5027 |
|
|
In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
|
5028 |
|
|
constant by
|
5029 |
|
|
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
5030 |
|
|
@ifnottex
|
5031 |
|
|
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
5032 |
|
|
@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
|
5033 |
|
|
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
5034 |
|
|
@end ifnottex
|
5035 |
|
|
@tex
|
5036 |
|
|
${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
|
5037 |
|
|
@end tex
|
5038 |
|
|
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
5039 |
|
|
respectively. For example, the following
|
5040 |
|
|
all refer to the same quantity:
|
5041 |
|
|
|
5042 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5043 |
|
|
_fourk_1 = 4K;
|
5044 |
|
|
_fourk_2 = 4096;
|
5045 |
|
|
_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
|
5046 |
|
|
_fourk_4 = 10000o;
|
5047 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5048 |
|
|
|
5049 |
|
|
Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
|
5050 |
|
|
conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
|
5051 |
|
|
|
5052 |
|
|
@node Symbolic Constants
|
5053 |
|
|
@subsection Symbolic Constants
|
5054 |
|
|
@cindex symbolic constants
|
5055 |
|
|
@kindex CONSTANT
|
5056 |
|
|
It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
|
5057 |
|
|
the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
|
5058 |
|
|
|
5059 |
|
|
@table @code
|
5060 |
|
|
@item MAXPAGESIZE
|
5061 |
|
|
@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
|
5062 |
|
|
The target's maximum page size.
|
5063 |
|
|
|
5064 |
|
|
@item COMMONPAGESIZE
|
5065 |
|
|
@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
|
5066 |
|
|
The target's default page size.
|
5067 |
|
|
@end table
|
5068 |
|
|
|
5069 |
|
|
So for example:
|
5070 |
|
|
|
5071 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5072 |
|
|
.text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
|
5073 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5074 |
|
|
|
5075 |
|
|
will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
|
5076 |
|
|
supported by the target.
|
5077 |
|
|
|
5078 |
|
|
@node Symbols
|
5079 |
|
|
@subsection Symbol Names
|
5080 |
|
|
@cindex symbol names
|
5081 |
|
|
@cindex names
|
5082 |
|
|
@cindex quoted symbol names
|
5083 |
|
|
@kindex "
|
5084 |
|
|
Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
|
5085 |
|
|
and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
|
5086 |
|
|
Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
|
5087 |
|
|
specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
|
5088 |
|
|
keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
|
5089 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5090 |
|
|
"SECTION" = 9;
|
5091 |
|
|
"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
|
5092 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5093 |
|
|
|
5094 |
|
|
Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
|
5095 |
|
|
to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
|
5096 |
|
|
whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
|
5097 |
|
|
|
5098 |
|
|
@node Orphan Sections
|
5099 |
|
|
@subsection Orphan Sections
|
5100 |
|
|
@cindex orphan
|
5101 |
|
|
Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
|
5102 |
|
|
are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
|
5103 |
|
|
script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
|
5104 |
|
|
output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
|
5105 |
|
|
placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
|
5106 |
|
|
attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
|
5107 |
|
|
same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
|
5108 |
|
|
If there is not enough room to do this then it places
|
5109 |
|
|
at the end of the file.
|
5110 |
|
|
|
5111 |
|
|
For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
|
5112 |
|
|
well as section flag.
|
5113 |
|
|
|
5114 |
|
|
If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
|
5115 |
|
|
the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
|
5116 |
|
|
__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
|
5117 |
|
|
section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
|
5118 |
|
|
orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
|
5119 |
|
|
representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
|
5120 |
|
|
character.
|
5121 |
|
|
|
5122 |
|
|
@node Location Counter
|
5123 |
|
|
@subsection The Location Counter
|
5124 |
|
|
@kindex .
|
5125 |
|
|
@cindex dot
|
5126 |
|
|
@cindex location counter
|
5127 |
|
|
@cindex current output location
|
5128 |
|
|
The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
|
5129 |
|
|
current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
|
5130 |
|
|
location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
|
5131 |
|
|
within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
|
5132 |
|
|
anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
|
5133 |
|
|
|
5134 |
|
|
@cindex holes
|
5135 |
|
|
Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
|
5136 |
|
|
moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
|
5137 |
|
|
location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
|
5138 |
|
|
and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
|
5139 |
|
|
doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
|
5140 |
|
|
|
5141 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5142 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
5143 |
|
|
@{
|
5144 |
|
|
output :
|
5145 |
|
|
@{
|
5146 |
|
|
file1(.text)
|
5147 |
|
|
. = . + 1000;
|
5148 |
|
|
file2(.text)
|
5149 |
|
|
. += 1000;
|
5150 |
|
|
file3(.text)
|
5151 |
|
|
@} = 0x12345678;
|
5152 |
|
|
@}
|
5153 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5154 |
|
|
@noindent
|
5155 |
|
|
In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
|
5156 |
|
|
located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
|
5157 |
|
|
followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
|
5158 |
|
|
@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
|
5159 |
|
|
@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
|
5160 |
|
|
specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
|
5161 |
|
|
|
5162 |
|
|
@cindex dot inside sections
|
5163 |
|
|
Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
|
5164 |
|
|
current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
|
5165 |
|
|
statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
|
5166 |
|
|
absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
|
5167 |
|
|
however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
|
5168 |
|
|
not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
|
5169 |
|
|
|
5170 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5171 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
5172 |
|
|
@{
|
5173 |
|
|
. = 0x100
|
5174 |
|
|
.text: @{
|
5175 |
|
|
*(.text)
|
5176 |
|
|
. = 0x200
|
5177 |
|
|
@}
|
5178 |
|
|
. = 0x500
|
5179 |
|
|
.data: @{
|
5180 |
|
|
*(.data)
|
5181 |
|
|
. += 0x600
|
5182 |
|
|
@}
|
5183 |
|
|
@}
|
5184 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5185 |
|
|
|
5186 |
|
|
The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
|
5187 |
|
|
and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
|
5188 |
|
|
the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
|
5189 |
|
|
much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
|
5190 |
|
|
move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
|
5191 |
|
|
and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
|
5192 |
|
|
the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
|
5193 |
|
|
the @samp{.data} output section itself.
|
5194 |
|
|
|
5195 |
|
|
@cindex dot outside sections
|
5196 |
|
|
Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
|
5197 |
|
|
output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
|
5198 |
|
|
needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
|
5199 |
|
|
|
5200 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5201 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
5202 |
|
|
@{
|
5203 |
|
|
start_of_text = . ;
|
5204 |
|
|
.text: @{ *(.text) @}
|
5205 |
|
|
end_of_text = . ;
|
5206 |
|
|
|
5207 |
|
|
start_of_data = . ;
|
5208 |
|
|
.data: @{ *(.data) @}
|
5209 |
|
|
end_of_data = . ;
|
5210 |
|
|
@}
|
5211 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5212 |
|
|
|
5213 |
|
|
If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
|
5214 |
|
|
not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
|
5215 |
|
|
between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
|
5216 |
|
|
should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
|
5217 |
|
|
blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
|
5218 |
|
|
the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
|
5219 |
|
|
sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
|
5220 |
|
|
statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
|
5221 |
|
|
special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
|
5222 |
|
|
place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
|
5223 |
|
|
as follows:
|
5224 |
|
|
|
5225 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5226 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
5227 |
|
|
@{
|
5228 |
|
|
start_of_text = . ;
|
5229 |
|
|
.text: @{ *(.text) @}
|
5230 |
|
|
end_of_text = . ;
|
5231 |
|
|
|
5232 |
|
|
start_of_data = . ;
|
5233 |
|
|
.rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
|
5234 |
|
|
.data: @{ *(.data) @}
|
5235 |
|
|
end_of_data = . ;
|
5236 |
|
|
@}
|
5237 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5238 |
|
|
|
5239 |
|
|
This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
|
5240 |
|
|
@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
|
5241 |
|
|
placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
|
5242 |
|
|
assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
|
5243 |
|
|
a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
|
5244 |
|
|
section. So you could write:
|
5245 |
|
|
|
5246 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5247 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
5248 |
|
|
@{
|
5249 |
|
|
start_of_text = . ;
|
5250 |
|
|
.text: @{ *(.text) @}
|
5251 |
|
|
end_of_text = . ;
|
5252 |
|
|
|
5253 |
|
|
. = . ;
|
5254 |
|
|
start_of_data = . ;
|
5255 |
|
|
.data: @{ *(.data) @}
|
5256 |
|
|
end_of_data = . ;
|
5257 |
|
|
@}
|
5258 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5259 |
|
|
|
5260 |
|
|
Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
|
5261 |
|
|
@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
|
5262 |
|
|
|
5263 |
|
|
@need 2000
|
5264 |
|
|
@node Operators
|
5265 |
|
|
@subsection Operators
|
5266 |
|
|
@cindex operators for arithmetic
|
5267 |
|
|
@cindex arithmetic operators
|
5268 |
|
|
@cindex precedence in expressions
|
5269 |
|
|
The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
|
5270 |
|
|
the standard bindings and precedence levels:
|
5271 |
|
|
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
5272 |
|
|
@ifnottex
|
5273 |
|
|
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
5274 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5275 |
|
|
precedence associativity Operators Notes
|
5276 |
|
|
(highest)
|
5277 |
|
|
1 left ! - ~ (1)
|
5278 |
|
|
2 left * / %
|
5279 |
|
|
3 left + -
|
5280 |
|
|
4 left >> <<
|
5281 |
|
|
5 left == != > < <= >=
|
5282 |
|
|
6 left &
|
5283 |
|
|
7 left |
|
5284 |
|
|
8 left &&
|
5285 |
|
|
9 left ||
|
5286 |
|
|
10 right ? :
|
5287 |
|
|
11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
|
5288 |
|
|
(lowest)
|
5289 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5290 |
|
|
Notes:
|
5291 |
|
|
(1) Prefix operators
|
5292 |
|
|
(2) @xref{Assignments}.
|
5293 |
|
|
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
5294 |
|
|
@end ifnottex
|
5295 |
|
|
@tex
|
5296 |
|
|
\vskip \baselineskip
|
5297 |
|
|
%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
|
5298 |
|
|
\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
|
5299 |
|
|
\hrule
|
5300 |
|
|
\halign
|
5301 |
|
|
{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
|
5302 |
|
|
height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
|
5303 |
|
|
&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
|
5304 |
|
|
height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
|
5305 |
|
|
\noalign{\hrule}
|
5306 |
|
|
height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
|
5307 |
|
|
&highest&&&&&\cr
|
5308 |
|
|
% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
|
5309 |
|
|
&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
|
5310 |
|
|
&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
|
5311 |
|
|
&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
|
5312 |
|
|
&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
|
5313 |
|
|
&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
|
5314 |
|
|
&6&&left&&\&&\cr
|
5315 |
|
|
&7&&left&&|&\cr
|
5316 |
|
|
&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
|
5317 |
|
|
&9&&left&&||&\cr
|
5318 |
|
|
&10&&right&&? :&\cr
|
5319 |
|
|
&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
|
5320 |
|
|
&lowest&&&&&\cr
|
5321 |
|
|
height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
|
5322 |
|
|
\hrule}
|
5323 |
|
|
@end tex
|
5324 |
|
|
@iftex
|
5325 |
|
|
{
|
5326 |
|
|
@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
|
5327 |
|
|
@dag@quad Prefix operators.
|
5328 |
|
|
@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
|
5329 |
|
|
}
|
5330 |
|
|
@end iftex
|
5331 |
|
|
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
5332 |
|
|
|
5333 |
|
|
@node Evaluation
|
5334 |
|
|
@subsection Evaluation
|
5335 |
|
|
@cindex lazy evaluation
|
5336 |
|
|
@cindex expression evaluation order
|
5337 |
|
|
The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
|
5338 |
|
|
an expression when absolutely necessary.
|
5339 |
|
|
|
5340 |
|
|
The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
|
5341 |
|
|
address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
|
5342 |
|
|
regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
|
5343 |
|
|
as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
|
5344 |
|
|
|
5345 |
|
|
However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
|
5346 |
|
|
until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
|
5347 |
|
|
other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
|
5348 |
|
|
for use in the symbol assignment expression.
|
5349 |
|
|
|
5350 |
|
|
The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
|
5351 |
|
|
assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
|
5352 |
|
|
allocation.
|
5353 |
|
|
|
5354 |
|
|
Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
|
5355 |
|
|
@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
|
5356 |
|
|
|
5357 |
|
|
If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
|
5358 |
|
|
available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
|
5359 |
|
|
following
|
5360 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5361 |
|
|
@group
|
5362 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
5363 |
|
|
@{
|
5364 |
|
|
.text 9+this_isnt_constant :
|
5365 |
|
|
@{ *(.text) @}
|
5366 |
|
|
@}
|
5367 |
|
|
@end group
|
5368 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5369 |
|
|
@noindent
|
5370 |
|
|
will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
|
5371 |
|
|
address}.
|
5372 |
|
|
|
5373 |
|
|
@node Expression Section
|
5374 |
|
|
@subsection The Section of an Expression
|
5375 |
|
|
@cindex expression sections
|
5376 |
|
|
@cindex absolute expressions
|
5377 |
|
|
@cindex relative expressions
|
5378 |
|
|
@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
|
5379 |
|
|
@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
|
5380 |
|
|
@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
|
5381 |
|
|
When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
|
5382 |
|
|
or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
|
5383 |
|
|
fixed offset from the base of a section.
|
5384 |
|
|
|
5385 |
|
|
The position of the expression within the linker script determines
|
5386 |
|
|
whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
|
5387 |
|
|
an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
|
5388 |
|
|
section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
|
5389 |
|
|
|
5390 |
|
|
A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
|
5391 |
|
|
relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
|
5392 |
|
|
further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
|
5393 |
|
|
section will be the section of the relative expression.
|
5394 |
|
|
|
5395 |
|
|
A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
|
5396 |
|
|
through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
|
5397 |
|
|
will not have any particular associated section.
|
5398 |
|
|
|
5399 |
|
|
You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
|
5400 |
|
|
to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
|
5401 |
|
|
create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
|
5402 |
|
|
section @samp{.data}:
|
5403 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5404 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
5405 |
|
|
@{
|
5406 |
|
|
.data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
|
5407 |
|
|
@}
|
5408 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5409 |
|
|
@noindent
|
5410 |
|
|
If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
|
5411 |
|
|
@samp{.data} section.
|
5412 |
|
|
|
5413 |
|
|
@node Builtin Functions
|
5414 |
|
|
@subsection Builtin Functions
|
5415 |
|
|
@cindex functions in expressions
|
5416 |
|
|
The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
|
5417 |
|
|
use in linker script expressions.
|
5418 |
|
|
|
5419 |
|
|
@table @code
|
5420 |
|
|
@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
|
5421 |
|
|
@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
|
5422 |
|
|
@cindex expression, absolute
|
5423 |
|
|
Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
|
5424 |
|
|
of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
|
5425 |
|
|
value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
|
5426 |
|
|
normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
|
5427 |
|
|
|
5428 |
|
|
@item ADDR(@var{section})
|
5429 |
|
|
@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
|
5430 |
|
|
@cindex section address in expression
|
5431 |
|
|
Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
|
5432 |
|
|
script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
|
5433 |
|
|
the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
|
5434 |
|
|
identical values:
|
5435 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5436 |
|
|
@group
|
5437 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
|
5438 |
|
|
.output1 :
|
5439 |
|
|
@{
|
5440 |
|
|
start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
|
5441 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
5442 |
|
|
@}
|
5443 |
|
|
.output :
|
5444 |
|
|
@{
|
5445 |
|
|
symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
|
5446 |
|
|
symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
|
5447 |
|
|
@}
|
5448 |
|
|
@dots{} @}
|
5449 |
|
|
@end group
|
5450 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5451 |
|
|
|
5452 |
|
|
@item ALIGN(@var{align})
|
5453 |
|
|
@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
|
5454 |
|
|
@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
|
5455 |
|
|
@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
|
5456 |
|
|
@cindex round up location counter
|
5457 |
|
|
@cindex align location counter
|
5458 |
|
|
@cindex round up expression
|
5459 |
|
|
@cindex align expression
|
5460 |
|
|
Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
|
5461 |
|
|
to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
|
5462 |
|
|
doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
|
5463 |
|
|
arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
|
5464 |
|
|
expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
|
5465 |
|
|
equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
|
5466 |
|
|
|
5467 |
|
|
Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
|
5468 |
|
|
next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
|
5469 |
|
|
variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
|
5470 |
|
|
input sections:
|
5471 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5472 |
|
|
@group
|
5473 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
|
5474 |
|
|
.data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
|
5475 |
|
|
*(.data)
|
5476 |
|
|
variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
|
5477 |
|
|
@}
|
5478 |
|
|
@dots{} @}
|
5479 |
|
|
@end group
|
5480 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5481 |
|
|
@noindent
|
5482 |
|
|
The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
|
5483 |
|
|
a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
|
5484 |
|
|
a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
|
5485 |
|
|
of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
|
5486 |
|
|
|
5487 |
|
|
The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
|
5488 |
|
|
|
5489 |
|
|
@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
|
5490 |
|
|
@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
|
5491 |
|
|
@cindex section alignment
|
5492 |
|
|
Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
|
5493 |
|
|
been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
|
5494 |
|
|
evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
|
5495 |
|
|
the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
|
5496 |
|
|
value in that section.
|
5497 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5498 |
|
|
@group
|
5499 |
|
|
SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
|
5500 |
|
|
.output @{
|
5501 |
|
|
LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
|
5502 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
5503 |
|
|
@}
|
5504 |
|
|
@dots{} @}
|
5505 |
|
|
@end group
|
5506 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5507 |
|
|
|
5508 |
|
|
@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
|
5509 |
|
|
@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
|
5510 |
|
|
This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
|
5511 |
|
|
scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
|
5512 |
|
|
section.
|
5513 |
|
|
|
5514 |
|
|
@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
|
5515 |
|
|
@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
|
5516 |
|
|
This is equivalent to either
|
5517 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5518 |
|
|
(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
|
5519 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5520 |
|
|
or
|
5521 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5522 |
|
|
(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
|
5523 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5524 |
|
|
@noindent
|
5525 |
|
|
depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
|
5526 |
|
|
for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
|
5527 |
|
|
@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
|
5528 |
|
|
If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
|
5529 |
|
|
memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
|
5530 |
|
|
bytes in the on-disk file.
|
5531 |
|
|
|
5532 |
|
|
This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
|
5533 |
|
|
any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
|
5534 |
|
|
@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
|
5535 |
|
|
be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
|
5536 |
|
|
working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
|
5537 |
|
|
|
5538 |
|
|
@noindent
|
5539 |
|
|
Example:
|
5540 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5541 |
|
|
. = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
|
5542 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5543 |
|
|
|
5544 |
|
|
@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
|
5545 |
|
|
@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
|
5546 |
|
|
This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
|
5547 |
|
|
evaluation purposes.
|
5548 |
|
|
|
5549 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5550 |
|
|
. = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
|
5551 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5552 |
|
|
|
5553 |
|
|
@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
|
5554 |
|
|
@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
|
5555 |
|
|
This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
|
5556 |
|
|
@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
|
5557 |
|
|
When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
|
5558 |
|
|
does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
|
5559 |
|
|
@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
|
5560 |
|
|
boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
|
5561 |
|
|
it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
|
5562 |
|
|
@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
|
5563 |
|
|
|
5564 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5565 |
|
|
. = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
|
5566 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5567 |
|
|
|
5568 |
|
|
@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
|
5569 |
|
|
@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
|
5570 |
|
|
@cindex symbol defaults
|
5571 |
|
|
Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
|
5572 |
|
|
defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
|
5573 |
|
|
return 0. You can use this function to provide
|
5574 |
|
|
default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
|
5575 |
|
|
shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
|
5576 |
|
|
the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
|
5577 |
|
|
existed, its value is preserved:
|
5578 |
|
|
|
5579 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5580 |
|
|
@group
|
5581 |
|
|
SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
|
5582 |
|
|
.text : @{
|
5583 |
|
|
begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
|
5584 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
5585 |
|
|
@}
|
5586 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
5587 |
|
|
@}
|
5588 |
|
|
@end group
|
5589 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5590 |
|
|
|
5591 |
|
|
@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
|
5592 |
|
|
@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
|
5593 |
|
|
Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
|
5594 |
|
|
|
5595 |
|
|
@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
|
5596 |
|
|
@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
|
5597 |
|
|
@cindex section load address in expression
|
5598 |
|
|
Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
|
5599 |
|
|
the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
|
5600 |
|
|
attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
|
5601 |
|
|
Section LMA}).
|
5602 |
|
|
|
5603 |
|
|
@kindex MAX
|
5604 |
|
|
@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
|
5605 |
|
|
Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
|
5606 |
|
|
|
5607 |
|
|
@kindex MIN
|
5608 |
|
|
@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
|
5609 |
|
|
Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
|
5610 |
|
|
|
5611 |
|
|
@item NEXT(@var{exp})
|
5612 |
|
|
@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
|
5613 |
|
|
@cindex unallocated address, next
|
5614 |
|
|
Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
|
5615 |
|
|
This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
|
5616 |
|
|
use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
|
5617 |
|
|
output file, the two functions are equivalent.
|
5618 |
|
|
|
5619 |
|
|
@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
|
5620 |
|
|
@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
|
5621 |
|
|
Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
|
5622 |
|
|
|
5623 |
|
|
@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
|
5624 |
|
|
@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
|
5625 |
|
|
Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
|
5626 |
|
|
value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
|
5627 |
|
|
option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
|
5628 |
|
|
@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
|
5629 |
|
|
be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
|
5630 |
|
|
``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
|
5631 |
|
|
name.
|
5632 |
|
|
|
5633 |
|
|
@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
|
5634 |
|
|
@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
|
5635 |
|
|
@cindex section size
|
5636 |
|
|
Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
|
5637 |
|
|
been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
|
5638 |
|
|
evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
|
5639 |
|
|
@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
|
5640 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5641 |
|
|
@group
|
5642 |
|
|
SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
|
5643 |
|
|
.output @{
|
5644 |
|
|
.start = . ;
|
5645 |
|
|
@dots{}
|
5646 |
|
|
.end = . ;
|
5647 |
|
|
@}
|
5648 |
|
|
symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
|
5649 |
|
|
symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
|
5650 |
|
|
@dots{} @}
|
5651 |
|
|
@end group
|
5652 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5653 |
|
|
|
5654 |
|
|
@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
|
5655 |
|
|
@itemx sizeof_headers
|
5656 |
|
|
@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
|
5657 |
|
|
@cindex header size
|
5658 |
|
|
Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
|
5659 |
|
|
information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
|
5660 |
|
|
this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
|
5661 |
|
|
choose, to facilitate paging.
|
5662 |
|
|
|
5663 |
|
|
@cindex not enough room for program headers
|
5664 |
|
|
@cindex program headers, not enough room
|
5665 |
|
|
When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
|
5666 |
|
|
@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
|
5667 |
|
|
number of program headers before it has determined all the section
|
5668 |
|
|
addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
|
5669 |
|
|
additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
|
5670 |
|
|
room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
|
5671 |
|
|
the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
|
5672 |
|
|
script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
|
5673 |
|
|
you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
|
5674 |
|
|
command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
|
5675 |
|
|
@end table
|
5676 |
|
|
|
5677 |
|
|
@node Implicit Linker Scripts
|
5678 |
|
|
@section Implicit Linker Scripts
|
5679 |
|
|
@cindex implicit linker scripts
|
5680 |
|
|
If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
|
5681 |
|
|
an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
|
5682 |
|
|
linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
|
5683 |
|
|
linker will report an error.
|
5684 |
|
|
|
5685 |
|
|
An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
|
5686 |
|
|
|
5687 |
|
|
Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
|
5688 |
|
|
assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
|
5689 |
|
|
commands.
|
5690 |
|
|
|
5691 |
|
|
Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
|
5692 |
|
|
at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
|
5693 |
|
|
read. This can affect archive searching.
|
5694 |
|
|
|
5695 |
|
|
@ifset GENERIC
|
5696 |
|
|
@node Machine Dependent
|
5697 |
|
|
@chapter Machine Dependent Features
|
5698 |
|
|
|
5699 |
|
|
@cindex machine dependencies
|
5700 |
|
|
@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
|
5701 |
|
|
sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
|
5702 |
|
|
functionality are not listed.
|
5703 |
|
|
|
5704 |
|
|
@menu
|
5705 |
|
|
@ifset H8300
|
5706 |
|
|
* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
|
5707 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5708 |
|
|
@ifset I960
|
5709 |
|
|
* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
|
5710 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5711 |
|
|
@ifset ARM
|
5712 |
|
|
* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
|
5713 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5714 |
|
|
@ifset HPPA
|
5715 |
|
|
* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
|
5716 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5717 |
|
|
@ifset M68K
|
5718 |
|
|
* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
|
5719 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5720 |
|
|
@ifset MMIX
|
5721 |
|
|
* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
|
5722 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5723 |
|
|
@ifset MSP430
|
5724 |
|
|
* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
|
5725 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5726 |
|
|
@ifset M68HC11
|
5727 |
|
|
* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
|
5728 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5729 |
|
|
@ifset POWERPC
|
5730 |
|
|
* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
|
5731 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5732 |
|
|
@ifset POWERPC64
|
5733 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
|
5734 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5735 |
|
|
@ifset SPU
|
5736 |
|
|
* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
|
5737 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5738 |
|
|
@ifset TICOFF
|
5739 |
|
|
* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
|
5740 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5741 |
|
|
@ifset WIN32
|
5742 |
|
|
* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
5743 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5744 |
|
|
@ifset XTENSA
|
5745 |
|
|
* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
|
5746 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5747 |
|
|
@end menu
|
5748 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5749 |
|
|
|
5750 |
|
|
@ifset H8300
|
5751 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
5752 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
5753 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
5754 |
|
|
|
5755 |
|
|
@node H8/300
|
5756 |
|
|
@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
|
5757 |
|
|
|
5758 |
|
|
@cindex H8/300 support
|
5759 |
|
|
For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
|
5760 |
|
|
you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
|
5761 |
|
|
|
5762 |
|
|
@table @emph
|
5763 |
|
|
@cindex relaxing on H8/300
|
5764 |
|
|
@item relaxing address modes
|
5765 |
|
|
@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
|
5766 |
|
|
targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
|
5767 |
|
|
program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
|
5768 |
|
|
respectively.
|
5769 |
|
|
|
5770 |
|
|
@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
|
5771 |
|
|
@item synthesizing instructions
|
5772 |
|
|
@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
|
5773 |
|
|
@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
|
5774 |
|
|
sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
|
5775 |
|
|
page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
|
5776 |
|
|
(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
|
5777 |
|
|
@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
|
5778 |
|
|
top page of memory).
|
5779 |
|
|
|
5780 |
|
|
@item bit manipulation instructions
|
5781 |
|
|
@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
|
5782 |
|
|
biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
|
5783 |
|
|
which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
|
5784 |
|
|
page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
|
5785 |
|
|
(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
|
5786 |
|
|
@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
|
5787 |
|
|
the top page of memory).
|
5788 |
|
|
|
5789 |
|
|
@item system control instructions
|
5790 |
|
|
@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
|
5791 |
|
|
32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
|
5792 |
|
|
changes them to use 16 bit address form.
|
5793 |
|
|
(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
|
5794 |
|
|
@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
|
5795 |
|
|
the top page of memory).
|
5796 |
|
|
@end table
|
5797 |
|
|
|
5798 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
5799 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
5800 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
5801 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5802 |
|
|
|
5803 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
5804 |
|
|
@ifset Renesas
|
5805 |
|
|
@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
|
5806 |
|
|
@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
|
5807 |
|
|
@node Renesas
|
5808 |
|
|
@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
|
5809 |
|
|
|
5810 |
|
|
@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
|
5811 |
|
|
H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
|
5812 |
|
|
options are required for these chips.
|
5813 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5814 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
5815 |
|
|
|
5816 |
|
|
@ifset I960
|
5817 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
5818 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
5819 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
5820 |
|
|
|
5821 |
|
|
@node i960
|
5822 |
|
|
@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
|
5823 |
|
|
|
5824 |
|
|
@cindex i960 support
|
5825 |
|
|
|
5826 |
|
|
You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
|
5827 |
|
|
specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
|
5828 |
|
|
family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
|
5829 |
|
|
incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
|
5830 |
|
|
linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
|
5831 |
|
|
libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
|
5832 |
|
|
search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
|
5833 |
|
|
|
5834 |
|
|
For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
|
5835 |
|
|
well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
|
5836 |
|
|
paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
|
5837 |
|
|
the names
|
5838 |
|
|
|
5839 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
5840 |
|
|
@group
|
5841 |
|
|
try
|
5842 |
|
|
libtry.a
|
5843 |
|
|
tryca
|
5844 |
|
|
libtryca.a
|
5845 |
|
|
@end group
|
5846 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
5847 |
|
|
|
5848 |
|
|
@noindent
|
5849 |
|
|
The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
|
5850 |
|
|
two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
|
5851 |
|
|
|
5852 |
|
|
You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
|
5853 |
|
|
the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
|
5854 |
|
|
use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
|
5855 |
|
|
specifies a library.
|
5856 |
|
|
|
5857 |
|
|
@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
|
5858 |
|
|
@cindex relaxing on i960
|
5859 |
|
|
@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
|
5860 |
|
|
you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
|
5861 |
|
|
@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
|
5862 |
|
|
them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
|
5863 |
|
|
instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
|
5864 |
|
|
instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
|
5865 |
|
|
target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
|
5866 |
|
|
not itself call any subroutines).
|
5867 |
|
|
|
5868 |
|
|
@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
|
5869 |
|
|
@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
|
5870 |
|
|
@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
|
5871 |
|
|
The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
|
5872 |
|
|
|
5873 |
|
|
The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
|
5874 |
|
|
|
5875 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
5876 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
5877 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
5878 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5879 |
|
|
|
5880 |
|
|
@ifset ARM
|
5881 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
5882 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
5883 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
5884 |
|
|
|
5885 |
|
|
@ifset M68HC11
|
5886 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
5887 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
5888 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
5889 |
|
|
|
5890 |
|
|
@node M68HC11/68HC12
|
5891 |
|
|
@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
|
5892 |
|
|
|
5893 |
|
|
@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
|
5894 |
|
|
|
5895 |
|
|
@subsection Linker Relaxation
|
5896 |
|
|
|
5897 |
|
|
For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
|
5898 |
|
|
optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
|
5899 |
|
|
|
5900 |
|
|
@table @emph
|
5901 |
|
|
@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
|
5902 |
|
|
@item relaxing address modes
|
5903 |
|
|
@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
|
5904 |
|
|
targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
|
5905 |
|
|
program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
|
5906 |
|
|
respectively.
|
5907 |
|
|
|
5908 |
|
|
@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
|
5909 |
|
|
transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
|
5910 |
|
|
page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
|
5911 |
|
|
|
5912 |
|
|
@item relaxing gcc instruction group
|
5913 |
|
|
When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
|
5914 |
|
|
of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
|
5915 |
|
|
addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
|
5916 |
|
|
@code{bset} instructions.
|
5917 |
|
|
|
5918 |
|
|
@end table
|
5919 |
|
|
|
5920 |
|
|
@subsection Trampoline Generation
|
5921 |
|
|
|
5922 |
|
|
@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
|
5923 |
|
|
@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
|
5924 |
|
|
For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
|
5925 |
|
|
call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
|
5926 |
|
|
will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
|
5927 |
|
|
trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
|
5928 |
|
|
case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
|
5929 |
|
|
point to the function trampoline.
|
5930 |
|
|
|
5931 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
5932 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
5933 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
5934 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
5935 |
|
|
|
5936 |
|
|
@node ARM
|
5937 |
|
|
@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
|
5938 |
|
|
|
5939 |
|
|
@cindex ARM interworking support
|
5940 |
|
|
@kindex --support-old-code
|
5941 |
|
|
For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
|
5942 |
|
|
between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
|
5943 |
|
|
been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
|
5944 |
|
|
line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
|
5945 |
|
|
libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
|
5946 |
|
|
option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
|
5947 |
|
|
given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
|
5948 |
|
|
which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
|
5949 |
|
|
the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
|
5950 |
|
|
non-interworking aware Thumb code.
|
5951 |
|
|
|
5952 |
|
|
@cindex thumb entry point
|
5953 |
|
|
@cindex entry point, thumb
|
5954 |
|
|
@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
|
5955 |
|
|
The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
|
5956 |
|
|
@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
|
5957 |
|
|
But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
|
5958 |
|
|
branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
|
5959 |
|
|
executing in Thumb mode straight away.
|
5960 |
|
|
|
5961 |
|
|
@cindex PE import table prefixing
|
5962 |
|
|
@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
|
5963 |
|
|
The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
|
5964 |
|
|
the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
|
5965 |
|
|
elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
|
5966 |
|
|
import tables. By default this option is turned off.
|
5967 |
|
|
|
5968 |
|
|
@cindex BE8
|
5969 |
|
|
@kindex --be8
|
5970 |
|
|
The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
|
5971 |
|
|
executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
|
5972 |
|
|
The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
|
5973 |
|
|
|
5974 |
|
|
@cindex TARGET1
|
5975 |
|
|
@kindex --target1-rel
|
5976 |
|
|
@kindex --target1-abs
|
5977 |
|
|
The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
|
5978 |
|
|
@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
|
5979 |
|
|
or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
|
5980 |
|
|
and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
|
5981 |
|
|
|
5982 |
|
|
@cindex TARGET2
|
5983 |
|
|
@kindex --target2=@var{type}
|
5984 |
|
|
The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
|
5985 |
|
|
@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
|
5986 |
|
|
meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
|
5987 |
|
|
@table @samp
|
5988 |
|
|
@item rel
|
5989 |
|
|
@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
|
5990 |
|
|
@item abs
|
5991 |
|
|
@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
|
5992 |
|
|
@item got-rel
|
5993 |
|
|
@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
|
5994 |
|
|
@end table
|
5995 |
|
|
|
5996 |
|
|
@cindex FIX_V4BX
|
5997 |
|
|
@kindex --fix-v4bx
|
5998 |
|
|
The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
|
5999 |
|
|
specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
|
6000 |
|
|
interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
|
6001 |
|
|
also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
|
6002 |
|
|
|
6003 |
|
|
In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
|
6004 |
|
|
linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
|
6005 |
|
|
@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
|
6006 |
|
|
|
6007 |
|
|
In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
|
6008 |
|
|
relocations are ignored.
|
6009 |
|
|
|
6010 |
|
|
@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
|
6011 |
|
|
@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
|
6012 |
|
|
Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
|
6013 |
|
|
relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
|
6014 |
|
|
|
6015 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
6016 |
|
|
TST rM, #1
|
6017 |
|
|
MOVEQ PC, rM
|
6018 |
|
|
BX Rn
|
6019 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
6020 |
|
|
|
6021 |
|
|
This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
|
6022 |
|
|
and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
|
6023 |
|
|
condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
|
6024 |
|
|
|
6025 |
|
|
@cindex USE_BLX
|
6026 |
|
|
@kindex --use-blx
|
6027 |
|
|
The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
|
6028 |
|
|
BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
|
6029 |
|
|
situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
|
6030 |
|
|
code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
|
6031 |
|
|
each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
|
6032 |
|
|
|
6033 |
|
|
This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
|
6034 |
|
|
specify it if you are using that target.
|
6035 |
|
|
|
6036 |
|
|
@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
|
6037 |
|
|
@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
|
6038 |
|
|
The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
|
6039 |
|
|
bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
|
6040 |
|
|
instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
|
6041 |
|
|
to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
|
6042 |
|
|
the support code can read the intended values.
|
6043 |
|
|
|
6044 |
|
|
The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
|
6045 |
|
|
intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
|
6046 |
|
|
and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
|
6047 |
|
|
intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
|
6048 |
|
|
full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
|
6049 |
|
|
you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
|
6050 |
|
|
|
6051 |
|
|
If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
|
6052 |
|
|
enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
|
6053 |
|
|
@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
|
6054 |
|
|
mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
|
6055 |
|
|
vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
|
6056 |
|
|
@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
|
6057 |
|
|
|
6058 |
|
|
If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
|
6059 |
|
|
potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
|
6060 |
|
|
such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
|
6061 |
|
|
first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
|
6062 |
|
|
instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
|
6063 |
|
|
the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
|
6064 |
|
|
are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
|
6065 |
|
|
|
6066 |
|
|
@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
|
6067 |
|
|
@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
|
6068 |
|
|
The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
|
6069 |
|
|
warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
|
6070 |
|
|
enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
|
6071 |
|
|
linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
|
6072 |
|
|
using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
|
6073 |
|
|
not be diagnosed.
|
6074 |
|
|
|
6075 |
|
|
@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
|
6076 |
|
|
@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
|
6077 |
|
|
The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
|
6078 |
|
|
warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
|
6079 |
|
|
@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
|
6080 |
|
|
linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
|
6081 |
|
|
using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
|
6082 |
|
|
|
6083 |
|
|
@cindex PIC_VENEER
|
6084 |
|
|
@kindex --pic-veneer
|
6085 |
|
|
The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
|
6086 |
|
|
ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
|
6087 |
|
|
is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
|
6088 |
|
|
@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
|
6089 |
|
|
|
6090 |
|
|
@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
|
6091 |
|
|
@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
|
6092 |
|
|
The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
|
6093 |
|
|
code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
|
6094 |
|
|
perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
|
6095 |
|
|
placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
|
6096 |
|
|
controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
|
6097 |
|
|
The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
|
6098 |
|
|
duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
|
6099 |
|
|
group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
|
6100 |
|
|
code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
|
6101 |
|
|
where they should be placed.
|
6102 |
|
|
|
6103 |
|
|
The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
|
6104 |
|
|
@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
|
6105 |
|
|
placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
|
6106 |
|
|
branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
|
6107 |
|
|
placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
|
6108 |
|
|
value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
|
6109 |
|
|
exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
|
6110 |
|
|
A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
|
6111 |
|
|
linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
|
6112 |
|
|
from the input sections.
|
6113 |
|
|
|
6114 |
|
|
The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
|
6115 |
|
|
@samp{N = +1}.
|
6116 |
|
|
|
6117 |
|
|
Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
|
6118 |
|
|
only, because it relies on object files properties not present
|
6119 |
|
|
otherwise.
|
6120 |
|
|
|
6121 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6122 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
6123 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6124 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
6125 |
|
|
|
6126 |
|
|
@ifset HPPA
|
6127 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6128 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
6129 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6130 |
|
|
|
6131 |
|
|
@node HPPA ELF32
|
6132 |
|
|
@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
|
6133 |
|
|
@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
|
6134 |
|
|
@kindex --multi-subspace
|
6135 |
|
|
When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
|
6136 |
|
|
import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
|
6137 |
|
|
The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
|
6138 |
|
|
stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
|
6139 |
|
|
multiple sub-spaces.
|
6140 |
|
|
|
6141 |
|
|
@cindex HPPA stub grouping
|
6142 |
|
|
@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
|
6143 |
|
|
Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
|
6144 |
|
|
stub sections located between groups of input sections.
|
6145 |
|
|
@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
|
6146 |
|
|
sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
|
6147 |
|
|
a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
|
6148 |
|
|
the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
|
6149 |
|
|
conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
|
6150 |
|
|
prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
|
6151 |
|
|
A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
|
6152 |
|
|
branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
|
6153 |
|
|
@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
|
6154 |
|
|
@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
|
6155 |
|
|
detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
|
6156 |
|
|
positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
|
6157 |
|
|
|
6158 |
|
|
Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
|
6159 |
|
|
single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
|
6160 |
|
|
create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
|
6161 |
|
|
large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
|
6162 |
|
|
|
6163 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6164 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
6165 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6166 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
6167 |
|
|
|
6168 |
|
|
@ifset M68K
|
6169 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6170 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
6171 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6172 |
|
|
|
6173 |
|
|
@node M68K
|
6174 |
|
|
@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
|
6175 |
|
|
|
6176 |
|
|
@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
|
6177 |
|
|
@kindex --got=@var{type}
|
6178 |
|
|
The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
|
6179 |
|
|
The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
|
6180 |
|
|
@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
|
6181 |
|
|
the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
|
6182 |
|
|
@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
|
6183 |
|
|
entries only at non-negative offsets.
|
6184 |
|
|
@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
|
6185 |
|
|
entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
|
6186 |
|
|
support such GOTs.
|
6187 |
|
|
@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
|
6188 |
|
|
output file. All GOT references from a single input object
|
6189 |
|
|
file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
|
6190 |
|
|
files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
|
6191 |
|
|
|
6192 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6193 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
6194 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6195 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
6196 |
|
|
|
6197 |
|
|
@ifset MMIX
|
6198 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6199 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
6200 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6201 |
|
|
|
6202 |
|
|
@node MMIX
|
6203 |
|
|
@section @code{ld} and MMIX
|
6204 |
|
|
For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
|
6205 |
|
|
@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
|
6206 |
|
|
understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
|
6207 |
|
|
can translate between the two formats.
|
6208 |
|
|
|
6209 |
|
|
There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
|
6210 |
|
|
Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
|
6211 |
|
|
registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
|
6212 |
|
|
equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
|
6213 |
|
|
@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
|
6214 |
|
|
global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
|
6215 |
|
|
this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
|
6216 |
|
|
symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
|
6217 |
|
|
|
6218 |
|
|
Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
|
6219 |
|
|
@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
|
6220 |
|
|
The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
|
6221 |
|
|
of a section.
|
6222 |
|
|
|
6223 |
|
|
Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
|
6224 |
|
|
are left out from an mmo file.
|
6225 |
|
|
|
6226 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6227 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
6228 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6229 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
6230 |
|
|
|
6231 |
|
|
@ifset MSP430
|
6232 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6233 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
6234 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6235 |
|
|
|
6236 |
|
|
@node MSP430
|
6237 |
|
|
@section @code{ld} and MSP430
|
6238 |
|
|
For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
|
6239 |
|
|
will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
|
6240 |
|
|
just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
|
6241 |
|
|
|
6242 |
|
|
@cindex MSP430 extra sections
|
6243 |
|
|
The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
|
6244 |
|
|
|
6245 |
|
|
@table @code
|
6246 |
|
|
@item @samp{.vectors}
|
6247 |
|
|
Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
|
6248 |
|
|
|
6249 |
|
|
@item @samp{.bootloader}
|
6250 |
|
|
Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
|
6251 |
|
|
in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
|
6252 |
|
|
|
6253 |
|
|
@item @samp{.infomem}
|
6254 |
|
|
Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
|
6255 |
|
|
this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
|
6256 |
|
|
|
6257 |
|
|
@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
|
6258 |
|
|
This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
|
6259 |
|
|
in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
|
6260 |
|
|
|
6261 |
|
|
@item @samp{.noinit}
|
6262 |
|
|
Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
|
6263 |
|
|
|
6264 |
|
|
The last two sections are used by gcc.
|
6265 |
|
|
@end table
|
6266 |
|
|
|
6267 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6268 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
6269 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6270 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
6271 |
|
|
|
6272 |
|
|
@ifset POWERPC
|
6273 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6274 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
6275 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6276 |
|
|
|
6277 |
|
|
@node PowerPC ELF32
|
6278 |
|
|
@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
|
6279 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC long branches
|
6280 |
|
|
@kindex --relax on PowerPC
|
6281 |
|
|
Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
|
6282 |
|
|
displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
|
6283 |
|
|
@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
|
6284 |
|
|
@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
|
6285 |
|
|
the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
|
6286 |
|
|
section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
|
6287 |
|
|
section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
|
6288 |
|
|
@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
|
6289 |
|
|
both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
|
6290 |
|
|
considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
|
6291 |
|
|
|
6292 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
|
6293 |
|
|
@table @option
|
6294 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC PLT
|
6295 |
|
|
@kindex --bss-plt
|
6296 |
|
|
@item --bss-plt
|
6297 |
|
|
Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
|
6298 |
|
|
generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
|
6299 |
|
|
the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
|
6300 |
|
|
writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
|
6301 |
|
|
@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
|
6302 |
|
|
PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
|
6303 |
|
|
compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
|
6304 |
|
|
BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
|
6305 |
|
|
|
6306 |
|
|
@kindex --secure-plt
|
6307 |
|
|
@item --secure-plt
|
6308 |
|
|
@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
|
6309 |
|
|
@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
|
6310 |
|
|
when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
|
6311 |
|
|
layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
|
6312 |
|
|
style BSS PLT.
|
6313 |
|
|
|
6314 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC GOT
|
6315 |
|
|
@kindex --sdata-got
|
6316 |
|
|
@item --sdata-got
|
6317 |
|
|
The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
|
6318 |
|
|
sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
|
6319 |
|
|
@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
|
6320 |
|
|
section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
|
6321 |
|
|
@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
|
6322 |
|
|
@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
|
6323 |
|
|
@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
|
6324 |
|
|
@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
|
6325 |
|
|
PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
|
6326 |
|
|
pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
|
6327 |
|
|
GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
|
6328 |
|
|
really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
|
6329 |
|
|
|
6330 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
|
6331 |
|
|
@kindex --emit-stub-syms
|
6332 |
|
|
@item --emit-stub-syms
|
6333 |
|
|
This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
|
6334 |
|
|
symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
6335 |
|
|
|
6336 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
|
6337 |
|
|
@kindex --no-tls-optimize
|
6338 |
|
|
@item --no-tls-optimize
|
6339 |
|
|
PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
|
6340 |
|
|
sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
|
6341 |
|
|
disable the optimization.
|
6342 |
|
|
@end table
|
6343 |
|
|
|
6344 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6345 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
6346 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6347 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
6348 |
|
|
|
6349 |
|
|
@ifset POWERPC64
|
6350 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6351 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
6352 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6353 |
|
|
|
6354 |
|
|
@node PowerPC64 ELF64
|
6355 |
|
|
@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
|
6356 |
|
|
|
6357 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
|
6358 |
|
|
@table @option
|
6359 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
|
6360 |
|
|
@kindex --stub-group-size
|
6361 |
|
|
@item --stub-group-size
|
6362 |
|
|
Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
|
6363 |
|
|
by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
|
6364 |
|
|
@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
|
6365 |
|
|
sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
|
6366 |
|
|
a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
|
6367 |
|
|
the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
|
6368 |
|
|
conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
|
6369 |
|
|
prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
|
6370 |
|
|
A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
|
6371 |
|
|
branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
|
6372 |
|
|
@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
|
6373 |
|
|
@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
|
6374 |
|
|
detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
|
6375 |
|
|
positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
|
6376 |
|
|
|
6377 |
|
|
Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
|
6378 |
|
|
single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
|
6379 |
|
|
create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
|
6380 |
|
|
large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
|
6381 |
|
|
|
6382 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
|
6383 |
|
|
@kindex --emit-stub-syms
|
6384 |
|
|
@item --emit-stub-syms
|
6385 |
|
|
This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
|
6386 |
|
|
symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
6387 |
|
|
|
6388 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
|
6389 |
|
|
@kindex --dotsyms
|
6390 |
|
|
@kindex --no-dotsyms
|
6391 |
|
|
@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
|
6392 |
|
|
These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
|
6393 |
|
|
in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
|
6394 |
|
|
function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
|
6395 |
|
|
code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
|
6396 |
|
|
properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
|
6397 |
|
|
to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
|
6398 |
|
|
@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
|
6399 |
|
|
dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
|
6400 |
|
|
feature.
|
6401 |
|
|
|
6402 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
|
6403 |
|
|
@kindex --no-tls-optimize
|
6404 |
|
|
@item --no-tls-optimize
|
6405 |
|
|
PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
|
6406 |
|
|
sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
|
6407 |
|
|
disable the optimization.
|
6408 |
|
|
|
6409 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
|
6410 |
|
|
@kindex --no-opd-optimize
|
6411 |
|
|
@item --no-opd-optimize
|
6412 |
|
|
PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
|
6413 |
|
|
corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
|
6414 |
|
|
the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
|
6415 |
|
|
Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
|
6416 |
|
|
|
6417 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
|
6418 |
|
|
@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
|
6419 |
|
|
@item --non-overlapping-opd
|
6420 |
|
|
Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
|
6421 |
|
|
@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
|
6422 |
|
|
the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
|
6423 |
|
|
entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
|
6424 |
|
|
|
6425 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
|
6426 |
|
|
@kindex --no-toc-optimize
|
6427 |
|
|
@item --no-toc-optimize
|
6428 |
|
|
PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
|
6429 |
|
|
entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
|
6430 |
|
|
reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
|
6431 |
|
|
marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
|
6432 |
|
|
marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
|
6433 |
|
|
relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
|
6434 |
|
|
unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
|
6435 |
|
|
reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
|
6436 |
|
|
discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
|
6437 |
|
|
reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
|
6438 |
|
|
code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
|
6439 |
|
|
optimization.
|
6440 |
|
|
|
6441 |
|
|
@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
|
6442 |
|
|
@kindex --no-multi-toc
|
6443 |
|
|
@item --no-multi-toc
|
6444 |
|
|
By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
|
6445 |
|
|
entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
|
6446 |
|
|
total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
|
6447 |
|
|
grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
|
6448 |
|
|
TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
|
6449 |
|
|
calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
|
6450 |
|
|
help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
|
6451 |
|
|
64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
|
6452 |
|
|
Use this option to turn off this feature.
|
6453 |
|
|
@end table
|
6454 |
|
|
|
6455 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6456 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
6457 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6458 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
6459 |
|
|
|
6460 |
|
|
@ifset SPU
|
6461 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6462 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
6463 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6464 |
|
|
|
6465 |
|
|
@node SPU ELF
|
6466 |
|
|
@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
|
6467 |
|
|
|
6468 |
|
|
@cindex SPU ELF options
|
6469 |
|
|
@table @option
|
6470 |
|
|
|
6471 |
|
|
@cindex SPU plugins
|
6472 |
|
|
@kindex --plugin
|
6473 |
|
|
@item --plugin
|
6474 |
|
|
This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
|
6475 |
|
|
|
6476 |
|
|
@cindex SPU overlays
|
6477 |
|
|
@kindex --no-overlays
|
6478 |
|
|
@item --no-overlays
|
6479 |
|
|
Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
|
6480 |
|
|
regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
|
6481 |
|
|
@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
|
6482 |
|
|
turns off all this special overlay handling.
|
6483 |
|
|
|
6484 |
|
|
@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
|
6485 |
|
|
@kindex --emit-stub-syms
|
6486 |
|
|
@item --emit-stub-syms
|
6487 |
|
|
This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
|
6488 |
|
|
symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
6489 |
|
|
|
6490 |
|
|
@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
|
6491 |
|
|
@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
|
6492 |
|
|
@item --extra-overlay-stubs
|
6493 |
|
|
This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
|
6494 |
|
|
function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
|
6495 |
|
|
on calls to non-overlay regions.
|
6496 |
|
|
|
6497 |
|
|
@cindex SPU local store size
|
6498 |
|
|
@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
|
6499 |
|
|
@item --local-store=lo:hi
|
6500 |
|
|
@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
|
6501 |
|
|
the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
|
6502 |
|
|
range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
|
6503 |
|
|
|
6504 |
|
|
@cindex SPU
|
6505 |
|
|
@kindex --stack-analysis
|
6506 |
|
|
@item --stack-analysis
|
6507 |
|
|
SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
|
6508 |
|
|
unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
|
6509 |
|
|
under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
|
6510 |
|
|
@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
|
6511 |
|
|
@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
|
6512 |
|
|
determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
|
6513 |
|
|
for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
|
6514 |
|
|
for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
|
6515 |
|
|
for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
|
6516 |
|
|
find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
|
6517 |
|
|
and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
|
6518 |
|
|
under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
|
6519 |
|
|
dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
|
6520 |
|
|
is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
|
6521 |
|
|
and calls will be given.
|
6522 |
|
|
|
6523 |
|
|
@cindex SPU
|
6524 |
|
|
@kindex --emit-stack-syms
|
6525 |
|
|
@item --emit-stack-syms
|
6526 |
|
|
This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
|
6527 |
|
|
in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
|
6528 |
|
|
These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
|
6529 |
|
|
functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
|
6530 |
|
|
functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
|
6531 |
|
|
such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
|
6532 |
|
|
The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
|
6533 |
|
|
@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
|
6534 |
|
|
@end table
|
6535 |
|
|
|
6536 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6537 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
6538 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6539 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
6540 |
|
|
|
6541 |
|
|
@ifset TICOFF
|
6542 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6543 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
6544 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6545 |
|
|
|
6546 |
|
|
@node TI COFF
|
6547 |
|
|
@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
|
6548 |
|
|
@cindex TI COFF versions
|
6549 |
|
|
@kindex --format=@var{version}
|
6550 |
|
|
The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
|
6551 |
|
|
TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
|
6552 |
|
|
also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
|
6553 |
|
|
format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
|
6554 |
|
|
header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
|
6555 |
|
|
|
6556 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6557 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
6558 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6559 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
6560 |
|
|
|
6561 |
|
|
@ifset WIN32
|
6562 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
6563 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
6564 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
6565 |
|
|
|
6566 |
|
|
@node WIN32
|
6567 |
|
|
@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
6568 |
|
|
|
6569 |
|
|
This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
|
6570 |
|
|
See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
|
6571 |
|
|
command line options mentioned here.
|
6572 |
|
|
|
6573 |
|
|
@table @emph
|
6574 |
|
|
@cindex import libraries
|
6575 |
|
|
@item import libraries
|
6576 |
|
|
The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
|
6577 |
|
|
libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
|
6578 |
|
|
regular static archives and are handled as any other static
|
6579 |
|
|
archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
|
6580 |
|
|
support for creating such libraries provided with the
|
6581 |
|
|
@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
|
6582 |
|
|
|
6583 |
|
|
@item exporting DLL symbols
|
6584 |
|
|
@cindex exporting DLL symbols
|
6585 |
|
|
The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
|
6586 |
|
|
|
6587 |
|
|
@table @emph
|
6588 |
|
|
@item using auto-export functionality
|
6589 |
|
|
@cindex using auto-export functionality
|
6590 |
|
|
By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
|
6591 |
|
|
which is controlled by the following command line options:
|
6592 |
|
|
|
6593 |
|
|
@itemize
|
6594 |
|
|
@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
|
6595 |
|
|
@item --exclude-symbols
|
6596 |
|
|
@item --exclude-libs
|
6597 |
|
|
@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
|
6598 |
|
|
@item --version-script
|
6599 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
6600 |
|
|
|
6601 |
|
|
When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
|
6602 |
|
|
(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
|
6603 |
|
|
symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
|
6604 |
|
|
often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
|
6605 |
|
|
private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
|
6606 |
|
|
options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
|
6607 |
|
|
exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
|
6608 |
|
|
final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
|
6609 |
|
|
|
6610 |
|
|
If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
|
6611 |
|
|
command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
|
6612 |
|
|
if either of the following are true:
|
6613 |
|
|
|
6614 |
|
|
@itemize
|
6615 |
|
|
@item A DEF file is used.
|
6616 |
|
|
@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
|
6617 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
6618 |
|
|
|
6619 |
|
|
@item using a DEF file
|
6620 |
|
|
@cindex using a DEF file
|
6621 |
|
|
Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
|
6622 |
|
|
an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
|
6623 |
|
|
exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
|
6624 |
|
|
name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
|
6625 |
|
|
command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
|
6626 |
|
|
|
6627 |
|
|
@example
|
6628 |
|
|
gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
|
6629 |
|
|
@end example
|
6630 |
|
|
|
6631 |
|
|
Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
|
6632 |
|
|
@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
|
6633 |
|
|
|
6634 |
|
|
Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
|
6635 |
|
|
|
6636 |
|
|
@example
|
6637 |
|
|
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
|
6638 |
|
|
|
6639 |
|
|
EXPORTS
|
6640 |
|
|
foo
|
6641 |
|
|
bar
|
6642 |
|
|
_bar = bar
|
6643 |
|
|
another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
|
6644 |
|
|
var1 DATA
|
6645 |
|
|
@end example
|
6646 |
|
|
|
6647 |
|
|
This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
|
6648 |
|
|
symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
|
6649 |
|
|
alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
|
6650 |
|
|
by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
|
6651 |
|
|
@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
|
6652 |
|
|
@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
|
6653 |
|
|
|
6654 |
|
|
The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
|
6655 |
|
|
name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
|
6656 |
|
|
the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
|
6657 |
|
|
|
6658 |
|
|
When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
|
6659 |
|
|
library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
|
6660 |
|
|
@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
|
6661 |
|
|
executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
|
6662 |
|
|
|
6663 |
|
|
With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
|
6664 |
|
|
specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
|
6665 |
|
|
non-default base address for the image.
|
6666 |
|
|
|
6667 |
|
|
If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
|
6668 |
|
|
or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
|
6669 |
|
|
filename specified on the command line.
|
6670 |
|
|
|
6671 |
|
|
The complete specification of an export symbol is:
|
6672 |
|
|
|
6673 |
|
|
@example
|
6674 |
|
|
EXPORTS
|
6675 |
|
|
( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
|
6676 |
|
|
| ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
|
6677 |
|
|
[ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
|
6678 |
|
|
@end example
|
6679 |
|
|
|
6680 |
|
|
Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
|
6681 |
|
|
@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
|
6682 |
|
|
@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
|
6683 |
|
|
@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
|
6684 |
|
|
Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
|
6685 |
|
|
@samp{<integer>} alias.
|
6686 |
|
|
|
6687 |
|
|
The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
|
6688 |
|
|
|
6689 |
|
|
@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
|
6690 |
|
|
will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
|
6691 |
|
|
by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
|
6692 |
|
|
linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
|
6693 |
|
|
library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
|
6694 |
|
|
|
6695 |
|
|
@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
|
6696 |
|
|
The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
|
6697 |
|
|
the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
|
6698 |
|
|
@code{*_imp__foo}).
|
6699 |
|
|
|
6700 |
|
|
@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
|
6701 |
|
|
well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
|
6702 |
|
|
read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
|
6703 |
|
|
variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
|
6704 |
|
|
the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
|
6705 |
|
|
extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
|
6706 |
|
|
application will behave unexpectedly.
|
6707 |
|
|
|
6708 |
|
|
@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
|
6709 |
|
|
it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
|
6710 |
|
|
symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
|
6711 |
|
|
API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
|
6712 |
|
|
the DLL without an import library.
|
6713 |
|
|
|
6714 |
|
|
See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
|
6715 |
|
|
other DEF file statements
|
6716 |
|
|
|
6717 |
|
|
@cindex creating a DEF file
|
6718 |
|
|
While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
|
6719 |
|
|
with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
|
6720 |
|
|
|
6721 |
|
|
@item Using decorations
|
6722 |
|
|
@cindex Using decorations
|
6723 |
|
|
Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
|
6724 |
|
|
itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
|
6725 |
|
|
declared as:
|
6726 |
|
|
|
6727 |
|
|
@example
|
6728 |
|
|
__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
|
6729 |
|
|
__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
|
6730 |
|
|
@end example
|
6731 |
|
|
|
6732 |
|
|
All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
|
6733 |
|
|
any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
|
6734 |
|
|
this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
|
6735 |
|
|
the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
|
6736 |
|
|
|
6737 |
|
|
Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
|
6738 |
|
|
decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
|
6739 |
|
|
instead:
|
6740 |
|
|
|
6741 |
|
|
@example
|
6742 |
|
|
__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
|
6743 |
|
|
__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
|
6744 |
|
|
@end example
|
6745 |
|
|
|
6746 |
|
|
This complicates the structure of library header files, because
|
6747 |
|
|
when included by the library itself the header must declare the
|
6748 |
|
|
variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
|
6749 |
|
|
code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
|
6750 |
|
|
of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
|
6751 |
|
|
omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
|
6752 |
|
|
@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
|
6753 |
|
|
information.
|
6754 |
|
|
@end table
|
6755 |
|
|
|
6756 |
|
|
@cindex automatic data imports
|
6757 |
|
|
@item automatic data imports
|
6758 |
|
|
The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
|
6759 |
|
|
by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
|
6760 |
|
|
compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
|
6761 |
|
|
issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
|
6762 |
|
|
code to these platforms, especially for large
|
6763 |
|
|
c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
|
6764 |
|
|
initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
|
6765 |
|
|
decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
|
6766 |
|
|
platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
|
6767 |
|
|
command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
|
6768 |
|
|
The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
|
6769 |
|
|
suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
|
6770 |
|
|
trigger the feature's use.
|
6771 |
|
|
|
6772 |
|
|
auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
|
6773 |
|
|
additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
|
6774 |
|
|
|
6775 |
|
|
"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
|
6776 |
|
|
documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
|
6777 |
|
|
|
6778 |
|
|
The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
|
6779 |
|
|
occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
|
6780 |
|
|
One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
|
6781 |
|
|
below.
|
6782 |
|
|
|
6783 |
|
|
@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
|
6784 |
|
|
For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
|
6785 |
|
|
object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
|
6786 |
|
|
offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
|
6787 |
|
|
field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
|
6788 |
|
|
in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
|
6789 |
|
|
without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
|
6790 |
|
|
The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
|
6791 |
|
|
references.
|
6792 |
|
|
|
6793 |
|
|
The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
|
6794 |
|
|
be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
|
6795 |
|
|
themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
|
6796 |
|
|
runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
|
6797 |
|
|
compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
|
6798 |
|
|
support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
|
6799 |
|
|
run without error on an older system.
|
6800 |
|
|
|
6801 |
|
|
@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
|
6802 |
|
|
enabled as needed.
|
6803 |
|
|
|
6804 |
|
|
@cindex direct linking to a dll
|
6805 |
|
|
@item direct linking to a dll
|
6806 |
|
|
The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
|
6807 |
|
|
including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
|
6808 |
|
|
libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
|
6809 |
|
|
traditional import library method, especially when linking large
|
6810 |
|
|
libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
|
6811 |
|
|
function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
|
6812 |
|
|
though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
|
6813 |
|
|
storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
|
6814 |
|
|
tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
|
6815 |
|
|
large or complex libraries when using import libs.
|
6816 |
|
|
|
6817 |
|
|
Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
|
6818 |
|
|
@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
|
6819 |
|
|
of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
|
6820 |
|
|
perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
|
6821 |
|
|
select the dll instead of an import library.
|
6822 |
|
|
|
6823 |
|
|
|
6824 |
|
|
For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
|
6825 |
|
|
to find, in the first directory of its search path,
|
6826 |
|
|
|
6827 |
|
|
@example
|
6828 |
|
|
libxxx.dll.a
|
6829 |
|
|
xxx.dll.a
|
6830 |
|
|
libxxx.a
|
6831 |
|
|
xxx.lib
|
6832 |
|
|
cygxxx.dll (*)
|
6833 |
|
|
libxxx.dll
|
6834 |
|
|
xxx.dll
|
6835 |
|
|
@end example
|
6836 |
|
|
|
6837 |
|
|
before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
|
6838 |
|
|
|
6839 |
|
|
(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
|
6840 |
|
|
where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
|
6841 |
|
|
@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
|
6842 |
|
|
file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
|
6843 |
|
|
@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
|
6844 |
|
|
|
6845 |
|
|
Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
|
6846 |
|
|
@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
|
6847 |
|
|
was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
|
6848 |
|
|
various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
|
6849 |
|
|
could coexist on the same machine.
|
6850 |
|
|
|
6851 |
|
|
The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
|
6852 |
|
|
applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
|
6853 |
|
|
libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
|
6854 |
|
|
|
6855 |
|
|
@example
|
6856 |
|
|
bin/
|
6857 |
|
|
cygxxx.dll
|
6858 |
|
|
lib/
|
6859 |
|
|
libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
|
6860 |
|
|
libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
|
6861 |
|
|
@end example
|
6862 |
|
|
|
6863 |
|
|
Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
|
6864 |
|
|
done two ways:
|
6865 |
|
|
|
6866 |
|
|
1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
|
6867 |
|
|
@example
|
6868 |
|
|
gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
|
6869 |
|
|
@end example
|
6870 |
|
|
|
6871 |
|
|
However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
|
6872 |
|
|
(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
|
6873 |
|
|
@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
|
6874 |
|
|
not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
|
6875 |
|
|
|
6876 |
|
|
2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
|
6877 |
|
|
directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
|
6878 |
|
|
should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
|
6879 |
|
|
making the app/dll.
|
6880 |
|
|
|
6881 |
|
|
@example
|
6882 |
|
|
ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
|
6883 |
|
|
@end example
|
6884 |
|
|
|
6885 |
|
|
Then you can link without any make environment changes.
|
6886 |
|
|
|
6887 |
|
|
@example
|
6888 |
|
|
gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
|
6889 |
|
|
@end example
|
6890 |
|
|
|
6891 |
|
|
This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
|
6892 |
|
|
perfectly legal
|
6893 |
|
|
|
6894 |
|
|
@example
|
6895 |
|
|
bin/
|
6896 |
|
|
cygxxx-5.dll
|
6897 |
|
|
lib/
|
6898 |
|
|
libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
|
6899 |
|
|
@end example
|
6900 |
|
|
|
6901 |
|
|
Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
|
6902 |
|
|
even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
|
6903 |
|
|
@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
|
6904 |
|
|
|
6905 |
|
|
Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
|
6906 |
|
|
wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
|
6907 |
|
|
|
6908 |
|
|
1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
|
6909 |
|
|
work with auto-imported data.
|
6910 |
|
|
|
6911 |
|
|
2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
|
6912 |
|
|
import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
|
6913 |
|
|
symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
|
6914 |
|
|
for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
|
6915 |
|
|
possible to do this without an import lib.
|
6916 |
|
|
|
6917 |
|
|
3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
|
6918 |
|
|
critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
|
6919 |
|
|
in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
|
6920 |
|
|
stdcall-decorated assembly names.
|
6921 |
|
|
|
6922 |
|
|
So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
|
6923 |
|
|
true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
|
6924 |
|
|
a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
|
6925 |
|
|
binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
|
6926 |
|
|
massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
|
6927 |
|
|
requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
|
6928 |
|
|
will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
|
6929 |
|
|
|
6930 |
|
|
@item symbol aliasing
|
6931 |
|
|
@table @emph
|
6932 |
|
|
@item adding additional names
|
6933 |
|
|
Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
|
6934 |
|
|
A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
|
6935 |
|
|
exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
|
6936 |
|
|
when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
|
6937 |
|
|
import library. Consider the following DEF file:
|
6938 |
|
|
|
6939 |
|
|
@example
|
6940 |
|
|
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
|
6941 |
|
|
|
6942 |
|
|
EXPORTS
|
6943 |
|
|
foo
|
6944 |
|
|
_foo = foo
|
6945 |
|
|
@end example
|
6946 |
|
|
|
6947 |
|
|
The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
|
6948 |
|
|
|
6949 |
|
|
Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
|
6950 |
|
|
source code using the "weak" attribute:
|
6951 |
|
|
|
6952 |
|
|
@example
|
6953 |
|
|
void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
|
6954 |
|
|
void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
|
6955 |
|
|
@end example
|
6956 |
|
|
|
6957 |
|
|
See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
|
6958 |
|
|
symbols.
|
6959 |
|
|
|
6960 |
|
|
@item renaming symbols
|
6961 |
|
|
Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
|
6962 |
|
|
kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
|
6963 |
|
|
@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
|
6964 |
|
|
DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
|
6965 |
|
|
created). In the following example:
|
6966 |
|
|
|
6967 |
|
|
@example
|
6968 |
|
|
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
|
6969 |
|
|
|
6970 |
|
|
EXPORTS
|
6971 |
|
|
_foo = foo
|
6972 |
|
|
@end example
|
6973 |
|
|
|
6974 |
|
|
The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
|
6975 |
|
|
@samp{_foo}.
|
6976 |
|
|
@end table
|
6977 |
|
|
|
6978 |
|
|
Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
|
6979 |
|
|
unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
|
6980 |
|
|
If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
|
6981 |
|
|
@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
|
6982 |
|
|
that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
|
6983 |
|
|
@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
|
6984 |
|
|
renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
|
6985 |
|
|
to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
|
6986 |
|
|
the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
|
6987 |
|
|
In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
|
6988 |
|
|
which is probably not what you wanted.
|
6989 |
|
|
|
6990 |
|
|
@cindex weak externals
|
6991 |
|
|
@item weak externals
|
6992 |
|
|
The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
|
6993 |
|
|
weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
|
6994 |
|
|
defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
|
6995 |
|
|
are three variants of weak externals:
|
6996 |
|
|
@itemize
|
6997 |
|
|
@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
|
6998 |
|
|
called lazy externals.
|
6999 |
|
|
@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
|
7000 |
|
|
This form is not presently implemented.
|
7001 |
|
|
@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
|
7002 |
|
|
implemented.
|
7003 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
7004 |
|
|
As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
|
7005 |
|
|
are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
|
7006 |
|
|
uses a default value.
|
7007 |
|
|
|
7008 |
|
|
@cindex aligned common symbols
|
7009 |
|
|
@item aligned common symbols
|
7010 |
|
|
As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
|
7011 |
|
|
desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
|
7012 |
|
|
the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
|
7013 |
|
|
carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
|
7014 |
|
|
by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
|
7015 |
|
|
tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
|
7016 |
|
|
but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
|
7017 |
|
|
warnings about unknown linker directives.
|
7018 |
|
|
@end table
|
7019 |
|
|
|
7020 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
7021 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
7022 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
7023 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
7024 |
|
|
|
7025 |
|
|
@ifset XTENSA
|
7026 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
7027 |
|
|
@raisesections
|
7028 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
7029 |
|
|
|
7030 |
|
|
@node Xtensa
|
7031 |
|
|
@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
|
7032 |
|
|
|
7033 |
|
|
@cindex Xtensa processors
|
7034 |
|
|
The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
|
7035 |
|
|
@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
|
7036 |
|
|
specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
|
7037 |
|
|
keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
|
7038 |
|
|
example, with the command:
|
7039 |
|
|
|
7040 |
|
|
@smallexample
|
7041 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
7042 |
|
|
@{
|
7043 |
|
|
.text : @{
|
7044 |
|
|
*(.literal .text)
|
7045 |
|
|
@}
|
7046 |
|
|
@}
|
7047 |
|
|
@end smallexample
|
7048 |
|
|
|
7049 |
|
|
@noindent
|
7050 |
|
|
@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
|
7051 |
|
|
and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
|
7052 |
|
|
literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
|
7053 |
|
|
interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
|
7054 |
|
|
group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
|
7055 |
|
|
files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
|
7056 |
|
|
and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
|
7057 |
|
|
|
7058 |
|
|
@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
|
7059 |
|
|
@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
|
7060 |
|
|
Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
|
7061 |
|
|
provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
|
7062 |
|
|
is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
|
7063 |
|
|
literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
|
7064 |
|
|
will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
|
7065 |
|
|
location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
|
7066 |
|
|
the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
|
7067 |
|
|
unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
|
7068 |
|
|
@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
|
7069 |
|
|
range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
|
7070 |
|
|
|
7071 |
|
|
For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
|
7072 |
|
|
to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
|
7073 |
|
|
instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
|
7074 |
|
|
instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
|
7075 |
|
|
instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
|
7076 |
|
|
@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
|
7077 |
|
|
hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
|
7078 |
|
|
By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
|
7079 |
|
|
switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
|
7080 |
|
|
density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
|
7081 |
|
|
instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
|
7082 |
|
|
performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
|
7083 |
|
|
linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
|
7084 |
|
|
a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
|
7085 |
|
|
|
7086 |
|
|
The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
|
7087 |
|
|
control the linker:
|
7088 |
|
|
|
7089 |
|
|
@cindex Xtensa options
|
7090 |
|
|
@table @option
|
7091 |
|
|
@kindex --no-relax
|
7092 |
|
|
@item --no-relax
|
7093 |
|
|
Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
|
7094 |
|
|
by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
|
7095 |
|
|
relaxation.
|
7096 |
|
|
|
7097 |
|
|
@item --size-opt
|
7098 |
|
|
When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
|
7099 |
|
|
more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
|
7100 |
|
|
no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
|
7101 |
|
|
alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
|
7102 |
|
|
preserve the correctness of the code.
|
7103 |
|
|
@end table
|
7104 |
|
|
|
7105 |
|
|
@ifclear GENERIC
|
7106 |
|
|
@lowersections
|
7107 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
7108 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
7109 |
|
|
|
7110 |
|
|
@ifclear SingleFormat
|
7111 |
|
|
@node BFD
|
7112 |
|
|
@chapter BFD
|
7113 |
|
|
|
7114 |
|
|
@cindex back end
|
7115 |
|
|
@cindex object file management
|
7116 |
|
|
@cindex object formats available
|
7117 |
|
|
@kindex objdump -i
|
7118 |
|
|
The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
|
7119 |
|
|
These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
|
7120 |
|
|
object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
|
7121 |
|
|
format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
|
7122 |
|
|
it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
|
7123 |
|
|
associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
|
7124 |
|
|
object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
|
7125 |
|
|
(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
|
7126 |
|
|
list all the formats available for your configuration.
|
7127 |
|
|
|
7128 |
|
|
@cindex BFD requirements
|
7129 |
|
|
@cindex requirements for BFD
|
7130 |
|
|
As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
|
7131 |
|
|
several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
|
7132 |
|
|
BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
|
7133 |
|
|
formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
|
7134 |
|
|
been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
|
7135 |
|
|
BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
|
7136 |
|
|
may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
|
7137 |
|
|
|
7138 |
|
|
One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
|
7139 |
|
|
mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
|
7140 |
|
|
useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
|
7141 |
|
|
conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
|
7142 |
|
|
|
7143 |
|
|
@menu
|
7144 |
|
|
* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
|
7145 |
|
|
@end menu
|
7146 |
|
|
|
7147 |
|
|
@node BFD outline
|
7148 |
|
|
@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
|
7149 |
|
|
@cindex opening object files
|
7150 |
|
|
@include bfdsumm.texi
|
7151 |
|
|
@end ifclear
|
7152 |
|
|
|
7153 |
|
|
@node Reporting Bugs
|
7154 |
|
|
@chapter Reporting Bugs
|
7155 |
|
|
@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
|
7156 |
|
|
@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
|
7157 |
|
|
|
7158 |
|
|
Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
|
7159 |
|
|
|
7160 |
|
|
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
|
7161 |
|
|
it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
|
7162 |
|
|
to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
|
7163 |
|
|
work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
|
7164 |
|
|
@command{ld}.
|
7165 |
|
|
|
7166 |
|
|
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
|
7167 |
|
|
information that enables us to fix the bug.
|
7168 |
|
|
|
7169 |
|
|
@menu
|
7170 |
|
|
* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
|
7171 |
|
|
* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
|
7172 |
|
|
@end menu
|
7173 |
|
|
|
7174 |
|
|
@node Bug Criteria
|
7175 |
|
|
@section Have You Found a Bug?
|
7176 |
|
|
@cindex bug criteria
|
7177 |
|
|
|
7178 |
|
|
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
|
7179 |
|
|
|
7180 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
7181 |
|
|
@cindex fatal signal
|
7182 |
|
|
@cindex linker crash
|
7183 |
|
|
@cindex crash of linker
|
7184 |
|
|
@item
|
7185 |
|
|
If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
|
7186 |
|
|
@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
|
7187 |
|
|
|
7188 |
|
|
@cindex error on valid input
|
7189 |
|
|
@item
|
7190 |
|
|
If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
|
7191 |
|
|
|
7192 |
|
|
@cindex invalid input
|
7193 |
|
|
@item
|
7194 |
|
|
If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
|
7195 |
|
|
may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
|
7196 |
|
|
object files are correct.
|
7197 |
|
|
|
7198 |
|
|
@item
|
7199 |
|
|
If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
|
7200 |
|
|
improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
|
7201 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
7202 |
|
|
|
7203 |
|
|
@node Bug Reporting
|
7204 |
|
|
@section How to Report Bugs
|
7205 |
|
|
@cindex bug reports
|
7206 |
|
|
@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
|
7207 |
|
|
|
7208 |
|
|
A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
|
7209 |
|
|
products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
|
7210 |
|
|
recommend you contact that organization first.
|
7211 |
|
|
|
7212 |
|
|
You can find contact information for many support companies and
|
7213 |
|
|
individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
|
7214 |
|
|
distribution.
|
7215 |
|
|
|
7216 |
|
|
@ifset BUGURL
|
7217 |
|
|
Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
|
7218 |
|
|
@value{BUGURL}.
|
7219 |
|
|
@end ifset
|
7220 |
|
|
|
7221 |
|
|
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
|
7222 |
|
|
@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
|
7223 |
|
|
fact or leave it out, state it!
|
7224 |
|
|
|
7225 |
|
|
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
|
7226 |
|
|
problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
|
7227 |
|
|
assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
|
7228 |
|
|
matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
|
7229 |
|
|
the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
|
7230 |
|
|
location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
|
7231 |
|
|
were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
|
7232 |
|
|
into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
|
7233 |
|
|
specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
|
7234 |
|
|
and the most helpful.
|
7235 |
|
|
|
7236 |
|
|
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
|
7237 |
|
|
the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
|
7238 |
|
|
on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
|
7239 |
|
|
|
7240 |
|
|
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
|
7241 |
|
|
bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
|
7242 |
|
|
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
|
7243 |
|
|
You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
|
7244 |
|
|
|
7245 |
|
|
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
|
7246 |
|
|
|
7247 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
7248 |
|
|
@item
|
7249 |
|
|
The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
|
7250 |
|
|
the @samp{--version} argument.
|
7251 |
|
|
|
7252 |
|
|
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
|
7253 |
|
|
the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
|
7254 |
|
|
|
7255 |
|
|
@item
|
7256 |
|
|
Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
|
7257 |
|
|
patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
|
7258 |
|
|
|
7259 |
|
|
@item
|
7260 |
|
|
The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
|
7261 |
|
|
version number.
|
7262 |
|
|
|
7263 |
|
|
@item
|
7264 |
|
|
What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
|
7265 |
|
|
``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
|
7266 |
|
|
|
7267 |
|
|
@item
|
7268 |
|
|
The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
|
7269 |
|
|
observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
|
7270 |
|
|
list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
|
7271 |
|
|
sufficient.
|
7272 |
|
|
|
7273 |
|
|
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
|
7274 |
|
|
and then we might not encounter the bug.
|
7275 |
|
|
|
7276 |
|
|
@item
|
7277 |
|
|
A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
|
7278 |
|
|
bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
|
7279 |
|
|
provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
|
7280 |
|
|
bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
|
7281 |
|
|
state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
|
7282 |
|
|
requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
|
7283 |
|
|
we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
|
7284 |
|
|
attachments are best.
|
7285 |
|
|
|
7286 |
|
|
If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
|
7287 |
|
|
@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
|
7288 |
|
|
object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
|
7289 |
|
|
@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
|
7290 |
|
|
how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
|
7291 |
|
|
|
7292 |
|
|
@item
|
7293 |
|
|
A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
|
7294 |
|
|
incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
|
7295 |
|
|
|
7296 |
|
|
Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
|
7297 |
|
|
will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
|
7298 |
|
|
not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
|
7299 |
|
|
a chance to make a mistake.
|
7300 |
|
|
|
7301 |
|
|
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
|
7302 |
|
|
say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
|
7303 |
|
|
copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
|
7304 |
|
|
C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
|
7305 |
|
|
and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
|
7306 |
|
|
fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
|
7307 |
|
|
you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
|
7308 |
|
|
any conclusion from our observations.
|
7309 |
|
|
|
7310 |
|
|
@item
|
7311 |
|
|
If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
|
7312 |
|
|
diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
|
7313 |
|
|
@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
|
7314 |
|
|
If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
|
7315 |
|
|
context, not by line number.
|
7316 |
|
|
|
7317 |
|
|
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
|
7318 |
|
|
sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
|
7319 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
7320 |
|
|
|
7321 |
|
|
Here are some things that are not necessary:
|
7322 |
|
|
|
7323 |
|
|
@itemize @bullet
|
7324 |
|
|
@item
|
7325 |
|
|
A description of the envelope of the bug.
|
7326 |
|
|
|
7327 |
|
|
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
|
7328 |
|
|
which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
|
7329 |
|
|
changes will not affect it.
|
7330 |
|
|
|
7331 |
|
|
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
|
7332 |
|
|
will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
|
7333 |
|
|
with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
|
7334 |
|
|
We recommend that you save your time for something else.
|
7335 |
|
|
|
7336 |
|
|
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
|
7337 |
|
|
of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
|
7338 |
|
|
output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
|
7339 |
|
|
less time, and so on.
|
7340 |
|
|
|
7341 |
|
|
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
|
7342 |
|
|
report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
|
7343 |
|
|
|
7344 |
|
|
@item
|
7345 |
|
|
A patch for the bug.
|
7346 |
|
|
|
7347 |
|
|
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
|
7348 |
|
|
the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
|
7349 |
|
|
a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
|
7350 |
|
|
to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
|
7351 |
|
|
|
7352 |
|
|
Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
|
7353 |
|
|
construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
|
7354 |
|
|
through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
|
7355 |
|
|
able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
|
7356 |
|
|
fixed.
|
7357 |
|
|
|
7358 |
|
|
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
|
7359 |
|
|
patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
|
7360 |
|
|
help us to understand.
|
7361 |
|
|
|
7362 |
|
|
@item
|
7363 |
|
|
A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
|
7364 |
|
|
|
7365 |
|
|
Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
|
7366 |
|
|
things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
|
7367 |
|
|
@end itemize
|
7368 |
|
|
|
7369 |
|
|
@node MRI
|
7370 |
|
|
@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
|
7371 |
|
|
@cindex MRI compatibility
|
7372 |
|
|
To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
|
7373 |
|
|
linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
|
7374 |
|
|
alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
|
7375 |
|
|
described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
|
7376 |
|
|
simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
|
7377 |
|
|
@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
|
7378 |
|
|
linker commands; these commands are described here.
|
7379 |
|
|
|
7380 |
|
|
In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
|
7381 |
|
|
file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
|
7382 |
|
|
features to make use of them.
|
7383 |
|
|
|
7384 |
|
|
You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
|
7385 |
|
|
@samp{-c} command-line option.
|
7386 |
|
|
|
7387 |
|
|
Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
|
7388 |
|
|
command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
|
7389 |
|
|
blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
|
7390 |
|
|
MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
|
7391 |
|
|
issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
|
7392 |
|
|
|
7393 |
|
|
Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
|
7394 |
|
|
|
7395 |
|
|
You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
|
7396 |
|
|
lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
|
7397 |
|
|
The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
|
7398 |
|
|
|
7399 |
|
|
@table @code
|
7400 |
|
|
@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
|
7401 |
|
|
@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
|
7402 |
|
|
@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
|
7403 |
|
|
Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
|
7404 |
|
|
the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
|
7405 |
|
|
@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
|
7406 |
|
|
your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
|
7407 |
|
|
script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
|
7408 |
|
|
commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
|
7409 |
|
|
input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
|
7410 |
|
|
@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
|
7411 |
|
|
|
7412 |
|
|
@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
|
7413 |
|
|
@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
|
7414 |
|
|
Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
|
7415 |
|
|
in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
|
7416 |
|
|
|
7417 |
|
|
@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
|
7418 |
|
|
|
7419 |
|
|
@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
|
7420 |
|
|
@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
|
7421 |
|
|
Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
|
7422 |
|
|
@var{expression} should be a power of two.
|
7423 |
|
|
|
7424 |
|
|
@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
|
7425 |
|
|
@item BASE @var{expression}
|
7426 |
|
|
Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
|
7427 |
|
|
absolute addresses) in the output file.
|
7428 |
|
|
|
7429 |
|
|
@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
|
7430 |
|
|
@item CHIP @var{expression}
|
7431 |
|
|
@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
|
7432 |
|
|
This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
|
7433 |
|
|
|
7434 |
|
|
@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
|
7435 |
|
|
@item END
|
7436 |
|
|
This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
|
7437 |
|
|
|
7438 |
|
|
@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
|
7439 |
|
|
@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
|
7440 |
|
|
Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
|
7441 |
|
|
language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
|
7442 |
|
|
|
7443 |
|
|
@enumerate
|
7444 |
|
|
@item
|
7445 |
|
|
S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
|
7446 |
|
|
|
7447 |
|
|
@item
|
7448 |
|
|
IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
|
7449 |
|
|
|
7450 |
|
|
@item
|
7451 |
|
|
COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
|
7452 |
|
|
@samp{COFF}
|
7453 |
|
|
@end enumerate
|
7454 |
|
|
|
7455 |
|
|
@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
|
7456 |
|
|
@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
|
7457 |
|
|
Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
|
7458 |
|
|
@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
|
7459 |
|
|
|
7460 |
|
|
The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
|
7461 |
|
|
same line, with no change in its effect.
|
7462 |
|
|
|
7463 |
|
|
@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
|
7464 |
|
|
@item LOAD @var{filename}
|
7465 |
|
|
@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
|
7466 |
|
|
Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
|
7467 |
|
|
same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
|
7468 |
|
|
command line.
|
7469 |
|
|
|
7470 |
|
|
@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
|
7471 |
|
|
@item NAME @var{output-name}
|
7472 |
|
|
@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
|
7473 |
|
|
MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
|
7474 |
|
|
option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
|
7475 |
|
|
|
7476 |
|
|
@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
|
7477 |
|
|
@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
|
7478 |
|
|
@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
|
7479 |
|
|
Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
|
7480 |
|
|
order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
|
7481 |
|
|
script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
|
7482 |
|
|
sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
|
7483 |
|
|
file, in the order specified.
|
7484 |
|
|
|
7485 |
|
|
@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
|
7486 |
|
|
@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
|
7487 |
|
|
@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
|
7488 |
|
|
@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
|
7489 |
|
|
Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
|
7490 |
|
|
@var{name} used in the linker input files.
|
7491 |
|
|
|
7492 |
|
|
@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
|
7493 |
|
|
@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
|
7494 |
|
|
@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
|
7495 |
|
|
@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
|
7496 |
|
|
You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
|
7497 |
|
|
specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
|
7498 |
|
|
If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
|
7499 |
|
|
@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
|
7500 |
|
|
@end table
|
7501 |
|
|
|
7502 |
|
|
@node GNU Free Documentation License
|
7503 |
|
|
@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
|
7504 |
|
|
@include fdl.texi
|
7505 |
|
|
|
7506 |
|
|
@node LD Index
|
7507 |
|
|
@unnumbered LD Index
|
7508 |
|
|
|
7509 |
|
|
@printindex cp
|
7510 |
|
|
|
7511 |
|
|
@tex
|
7512 |
|
|
% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
|
7513 |
|
|
% meantime:
|
7514 |
|
|
\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
|
7515 |
|
|
\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
|
7516 |
|
|
\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
|
7517 |
|
|
\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
|
7518 |
|
|
\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
|
7519 |
|
|
\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
|
7520 |
|
|
\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
|
7521 |
|
|
\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
|
7522 |
|
|
\page\colophon
|
7523 |
|
|
% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
|
7524 |
|
|
@end tex
|
7525 |
|
|
|
7526 |
|
|
@bye
|